Yamaha RX-A880 de handleiding

Merk: Yamaha

Model: RX-A880

Categorie: Auto media-ontvangers

Type: de handleiding

AV Receiver

Owner's Manual

• This unit is a product for enjoying video and music at home.

• This manual explains preparations and operations for everyday users of the unit.

• Read the supplied booklet “Quick Start Guide” before using the unit.

CONTENTS

BEFORE USING THE UNIT 8

How to use this manual............................................................................ 8

How to use this manual......................................................................................................................................................... 8

Checking the accessories.......................................................................... 8

Checking the accessories...................................................................................................................................................... 8

Using the remote control......................................................................... 9

Insert the batteries in the remote control....................................................................................................................... 9

Operating range of the remote control........................................................................................................................... 9

FEATURES 10

What you can do with the unit............................................................... 10

Part names and functions...................................................................... 12

Part names and functions of the front panel............................................................................................................... 12

Part names and functions of the front display............................................................................................................ 14

Part names and functions of the rear panel................................................................................................................. 15

Part names and functions of the remote control....................................................................................................... 16

PREPARATIONS 17

1 Connecting speakers........................................................................ 17

Names and functions of speakers.................................................................................................................................... 17

Speaker systems and speakers to be connected....................................................................................................... 18

Speaker requirements.......................................................................................................................................................... 18

Setting the speaker impedance....................................................................................................................................... 19

Cable requirements.............................................................................................................................................................. 19

How to connect speakers................................................................................................................................................... 19

How to place speakers (speaker systems).................................................................................................................... 21

Advanced speaker systems................................................................................................................................................ 27

2 Connecting a TV................................................................................ 30

HDMI connection with a TV............................................................................................................................................... 30

HDMI connection with another TV or a projector..................................................................................................... 30

3 Connecting playback devices.......................................................... 31

HDMI connection with a video device such as a BD/DVD player......................................................................... 31

Connection other than HDMI with a playback device............................................................................................. 31

Connecting to the jack on the front panel................................................................................................................... 33

4 Connecting the radio antennas....................................................... 34

Connecting the FM/AM antennas (Except for U.K., Europe, Russia, Middle East and Australia models)

......................................................................................................................................................................................................

Connecting the DAB/FM antenna (U.K., Europe, Russia, Middle East and Australia models).................... 35

5 Preparing for connecting to a network........................................... 36

Preparing for connecting to a network......................................................................................................................... 36

Connecting a network cable (wired connection)...................................................................................................... 36

Preparing wireless antennas (wireless connection).................................................................................................. 37

6 Connecting other devices................................................................ 37

Connecting an external power amplifier...................................................................................................................... 37

Connecting a device compatible with the trigger function.................................................................................. 38

7 Plugging in the power cable............................................................ 39

Plugging in the power cable............................................................................................................................................. 39

8 Selecting the on-screen menu language........................................ 40

Selecting the on-screen menu language...................................................................................................................... 40

9 Configuring the necessary speaker settings.................................. 41

Assigning speaker configuration..................................................................................................................................... 41

Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO).......................................................................................... 42

YPAO measuring at multiple listening positions (multi measure)....................................................................... 44

Checking the YPAO measurement results.................................................................................................................... 45

Reloading the previous YPAO adjustments................................................................................................................. 46

Error messages from YPAO................................................................................................................................................ 47

Warning messages from YPAO......................................................................................................................................... 48

10 Setting MusicCast............................................................................. 49

What is MusicCast.................................................................................................................................................................. 49

Using MusicCast CONTROLLER......................................................................................................................................... 49

Adding the unit to the MusicCast network.................................................................................................................. 49

ENJOYING SOUND 50

Enjoying sound field effects.................................................................. 50

Select your favorite sound mode..................................................................................................................................... 50

Enjoying 3D sound fields (CINEMA DSP 3D)................................................................................................................ 50

Enjoying sound field effects optimized for the type of content........................................................................... 51

Enjoying sound field effects without surround speakers (Virtual CINEMA DSP)............................................ 51

Enjoying surround sound with 5 speakers placed in front (Virtual CINEMA FRONT).................................... 51

Enjoying surround sound with headphones (SILENT CINEMA)............................................................................ 51

Enjoying unprocessed playback............................................................ 52

Enjoying original sound (straight decode)................................................................................................................... 52

Enjoying multichannel playback without sound field effects (surround decoder)....................................... 52

Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (Pure Direct)......................................................................................................... 53

Enjoying enhanced bass sound............................................................. 54

Enhancing the bass (Extra Bass)....................................................................................................................................... 54

Enjoying enhanced compressed music................................................. 54

Playing back digitally compressed formats with enriched sound (Compressed Music Enhancer)......... 54

Enjoying Dolby Atmos® and DTS:X™..................................................... 55

Enjoying Dolby Atmos® and DTS:X™.............................................................................................................................. 55

Enjoying music in multiple rooms......................................................... 56

Playing back music in multiple rooms........................................................................................................................... 56

Connecting Zone2 speakers.............................................................................................................................................. 56

Operating the unit from Zone2 (remote connection).............................................................................................. 58

Controlling Zone2................................................................................................................................................................. 59

Enjoying the same source in multiple rooms (party mode)................................................................................... 60

PLAYBACK 61

Basic playback procedure...................................................................... 61

Basic procedure for playing back video and music................................................................................................... 61

Selecting an HDMI output jack......................................................................................................................................... 62

Switching information on the front display................................................................................................................. 62

Item names and functions of the playback screen.................................................................................................... 63

Item names and functions of the browse screen....................................................................................................... 64

Listening to FM/AM radio (Except for U.K., Europe, Russia, Middle

East and Australia models)..................................................................... 65

Setting the frequency steps............................................................................................................................................... 65

Selecting a frequency for reception............................................................................................................................... 66

Selecting a preset station................................................................................................................................................... 67

Registering FM radio stations automatically (FM Auto Preset)............................................................................. 67

Registering a radio station manually.............................................................................................................................. 68

Clearing preset stations....................................................................................................................................................... 69

Clearing all preset stations................................................................................................................................................. 69

Listening to DAB radio (U.K., Europe, Russia, Middle East and

Australia models).................................................................................... 70

Preparing the DAB tuning.................................................................................................................................................. 70

Selecting a DAB radio station for reception................................................................................................................. 71

Selecting a preset DAB radio station.............................................................................................................................. 71

Registering a DAB radio station as presets................................................................................................................... 72

Clearing preset DAB radio stations................................................................................................................................. 73

Clearing all preset DAB radio stations............................................................................................................................ 73

Displaying the DAB information...................................................................................................................................... 74

Checking reception strength of each DAB channel label....................................................................................... 75

Listening to FM radio (U.K., Europe, Russia, Middle East and

Australia models).................................................................................... 76

Selecting a frequency for FM radio reception............................................................................................................. 76

Selecting a preset FM radio station................................................................................................................................. 77

Registering FM radio stations automatically (FM Auto Preset)............................................................................. 77

Registering an FM radio station manually.................................................................................................................... 78

Clearing preset FM radio stations.................................................................................................................................... 79

Clearing all preset FM radio stations.............................................................................................................................. 79

Displaying the Radio Data System information......................................................................................................... 80

Playing back music stored on a Bluetooth® device.............................. 81

Playback Bluetooth® device music on the unit........................................................................................................... 81

Enjoying audio using Bluetooth® speakers/headphones....................................................................................... 82

Playing back music with AirPlay............................................................ 83

Playback of iTunes/iPhone music contents with AirPlay........................................................................................ 83

Playing back music stored on a USB storage device............................ 84

Playback of USB storage device contents..................................................................................................................... 84

Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)...................... 85

Media sharing setup on media servers (PCs/NAS)..................................................................................................... 85

Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)......................................................................................... 85

Listening to Internet radio..................................................................... 87

Selecting an Internet radio station.................................................................................................................................. 87

Registering favorite Internet radio stations................................................................................................................. 87

Listening to music streaming services.................................................. 88

Listening to a streaming service...................................................................................................................................... 88

Useful playback functions...................................................................... 89

SCENE function....................................................................................................................................................................... 89

Shortcut function................................................................................................................................................................... 92

Configuring playback settings for different playback sources

(Option menu)......................................................................................... 94

Basic operation of the Option menu.............................................................................................................................. 94

Option menu items............................................................................................................................................................... 95

Adjusting the tone of the audio output........................................................................................................................ 96

Configuring the volume automatically based on the YPAO measurement results...................................... 96

Adjusting the volume or perceive height of dialogue sounds............................................................................. 97

Adjusting the delay of the Lipsync function................................................................................................................ 98

Setting Compressed Music Enhancer............................................................................................................................ 98

Correcting volume differences during playback........................................................................................................ 99

Setting the use of Extra Bass.............................................................................................................................................. 99

Enabling the video signal processing.......................................................................................................................... 100

Selecting a video source to be output with the selected audio source.......................................................... 100

Configuring the shuffle/repeat setting....................................................................................................................... 100

Switching between stereo and monaural for FM radio reception.................................................................... 101

Setting presets for radio stations.................................................................................................................................. 101

Adding an Internet radio station to the “Favorites” folder.................................................................................. 103

Removing an Internet radio station from the “Favorites” folder....................................................................... 103

Performing an initial scan for DAB radio reception................................................................................................ 103

Checking reception strength of each DAB channel label..................................................................................... 104

Checking the current status information................................................................................................................... 104

CONFIGURATIONS 105

Configuring various functions (Setup menu)..................................... 105

Basic operation of the Setup menu.............................................................................................................................. 105

Setup menu items............................................................................................................................................................... 106

Configuring the speaker settings........................................................ 110

Setting your speaker system........................................................................................................................................... 110

Setting the size of the front speakers.......................................................................................................................... 110

Setting the use of a center speaker and its size....................................................................................................... 111

Setting the use of surround speakers and their size.............................................................................................. 111

Setting the layout of the surround speakers............................................................................................................. 112

Setting the use of surround back speakers and their size.................................................................................... 112

Setting the use of presence speakers and their size.............................................................................................. 113

Setting the layout of the presence speakers............................................................................................................. 113

Setting the crossover frequency of the low-frequency components.............................................................. 113

Setting the use of a subwoofer...................................................................................................................................... 114

Setting the phase of the subwoofer............................................................................................................................. 114

Setting the distance between each speaker and the listening position......................................................... 114

Adjusting the volume of each speaker........................................................................................................................ 114

Setting the equalizer.......................................................................................................................................................... 115

Outputting test tones........................................................................................................................................................ 116

Reloading the previous YPAO adjustments.............................................................................................................. 116

Configuring the sound settings........................................................... 117

Checking the current audio signal information....................................................................................................... 117

Enabling Lipsync adjustment......................................................................................................................................... 117

Setting the adjustment method of the Lipsync function..................................................................................... 118

Adjusting the delay of the Lipsync function............................................................................................................. 118

Selecting sound programs............................................................................................................................................... 119

Adjusting the sound field effect level.......................................................................................................................... 120

Adjusting the delay between the direct sound and presence sound field generation............................. 120

Adjusting the broadening effect of the presence sound field........................................................................... 120

Adjusting the loss of the presence sound field........................................................................................................ 121

Adjusting the decay time of the rear reverberant sound..................................................................................... 121

Adjusting the delay between the direct sound and reverberant sound generation................................. 121

Adjusting the volume of the reverberant sound..................................................................................................... 121

Adjusting the delay between the direct sound and surround sound field generation............................ 122

Adjusting the broadening effect of the surround sound field........................................................................... 122

Adjusting the loss of the surround sound field........................................................................................................ 122

Adjusting the delay between the direct sound and surround back sound field generation.................. 122

Adjusting the broadening effect of the surround back sound field................................................................. 123

Adjusting the loss of the surround back sound field............................................................................................. 123

Selecting the surround decoder used in the program.......................................................................................... 123

Setting the use of Center Spread.................................................................................................................................. 124

Adjusting the center localization (broadening effect) of the front sound field........................................... 124

Adjusting the entire volume for “7ch Stereo”........................................................................................................... 124

Adjusting the front and rear volume balance for “7ch Stereo”.......................................................................... 124

Adjusting the left and right volume balance for “7ch Stereo”............................................................................ 124

Adjusting the height volume balance using the presence speakers for “7ch Stereo”............................... 125

Setting the use of Monaural Mix for “7ch Stereo”................................................................................................... 125

Setting the dynamic range adjustment method..................................................................................................... 125

Setting the limit value of the volume.......................................................................................................................... 125

Setting the initial volume for when the unit is turned on.................................................................................... 126

Adjusting the CINEMA DSP 3D effect level automatically.................................................................................... 126

Setting Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS)......................................................................................................... 126

Configuring the scene settings............................................................ 127

Selecting items to be included as the scene assignments................................................................................... 127

Renaming the SCENE name............................................................................................................................................. 128

Configuring the video/HDMI settings................................................. 129

Checking the current video and HDMI signal information.................................................................................. 129

Setting the use of the video signal processing........................................................................................................ 129

Setting a resolution to output HDMI video signals................................................................................................ 129

Setting an aspect ratio to output HDMI video signals........................................................................................... 130

Setting the use of HDMI Control.................................................................................................................................... 130

Setting the audio jack used for TV audio input........................................................................................................ 130

Setting the use of ARC....................................................................................................................................................... 130

Linking the standby modes of the unit and the TV................................................................................................ 131

Setting the output of HDMI audio from the TV speaker....................................................................................... 131

Setting the version of HDCP used on the HDMI input jacks................................................................................ 131

Setting the use of HDMI Standby Through................................................................................................................ 131

Configuring the network settings....................................................... 132

Checking the network information on the unit....................................................................................................... 132

Setting the network connection method (Wired/Wireless)................................................................................ 132

Setting the network parameters automatically (DHCP)........................................................................................ 132

Setting the network parameters manually................................................................................................................ 133

Setting the use of the Network Standby function.................................................................................................. 133

Setting the MAC address filter........................................................................................................................................ 134

Setting the MAC address.................................................................................................................................................. 134

Setting the use of a Digital Media Controller............................................................................................................ 134

Setting the use of volume control via AirPlay........................................................................................................... 134

Setting the network name of the unit......................................................................................................................... 135

Setting the power interlock from the unit to MusicCast compatible devices.............................................. 135

Configuring the Bluetooth® settings.................................................. 136

Setting the use of Bluetooth®......................................................................................................................................... 136

Terminating the connection between a Bluetooth® device and the unit...................................................... 136

Setting the use of the Bluetooth® Standby function.............................................................................................. 136

Setting the use of audio transmission to a Bluetooth® device........................................................................... 137

Connecting the unit to a Bluetooth® device that receives transmitted audio............................................. 137

Configuring the multi zone settings................................................... 138

Checking the Zone2 information.................................................................................................................................. 138

Setting the use of volume adjustments for Zone2 output.................................................................................. 138

Setting the Zone2 limit value of the volume............................................................................................................ 138

Setting the Zone2 initial volume for when the unit is turned on...................................................................... 139

Adjusting the time deviation in relation to the main zone.................................................................................. 139

Switching between stereo and monaural for Zone2 output.............................................................................. 139

Setting the use of Compressed Music Enhancer for Zone2 output.................................................................. 140

Adjusting the tone for Zone2 output.......................................................................................................................... 140

Setting the use of Extra Bass for Zone2 output........................................................................................................ 140

Adjusting the volume balance for Zone2 output.................................................................................................... 140

Renaming the zone name................................................................................................................................................ 141

Setting the use of switching to the party mode on Zone2.................................................................................. 141

Configuring the system settings......................................................... 142

Checking the system information on the unit.......................................................................................................... 142

Setting the on-screen menu language....................................................................................................................... 142

Combining audio of another input source with video of the current input source................................... 143

Setting input sources to be skipped when operating the INPUT key.............................................................. 144

Automatically changing the input source names displayed on the front display...................................... 145

Manually changing the input source names displayed on the front display................................................ 145

Setting the use of Auto Play function.......................................................................................................................... 146

Setting sound programs to skip when operating the PROGRAM key............................................................. 146

Setting the function for the PROGRAM key on the remote control................................................................. 146

Setting the unit's functions for the RED/GREEN/YELLOW/BLUE keys of the remote control.................. 147

Adjusting the brightness of the front display........................................................................................................... 147

Setting the scale of the volume display...................................................................................................................... 147

Setting the use of short messages on the TV............................................................................................................ 147

Setting the image to be used as wallpaper on the TV........................................................................................... 147

Specifying the condition for the TRIGGER OUT jack to function....................................................................... 148

Specifying the output level of the electronic signal transmitted with each input..................................... 148

Switching the output level for electronic signal transmission manually........................................................ 148

Specifying the zone with which the TRIGGER OUT jack functions are synchronized................................ 148

Setting the amount of time for the auto-standby function................................................................................. 149

Setting the use of the eco mode................................................................................................................................... 149

Preventing accidental changes to the settings........................................................................................................ 149

Updating the firmware via the network..................................................................................................................... 150

Configuring the advanced settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu)....... 151

Basic operation of the ADVANCED SETUP menu..................................................................................................... 151

ADVANCED SETUP menu items..................................................................................................................................... 151

Changing the speaker impedance setting (SP IMP.).............................................................................................. 152

Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTE ID).......................................................................................................... 152

Changing the FM/AM tuning frequency setting (TU)............................................................................................ 152

Switching the video signal type (TV FORMAT)......................................................................................................... 152

Removing the limitation on HDMI video output (MON.CHK)............................................................................. 153

Selecting the HDMI 4K signal format (4K MODE).................................................................................................... 153

Setting DTS Format Notification (DTS MODE).......................................................................................................... 154

Backuping and restoring all the settings (BKUP/RSTR)......................................................................................... 154

Restoring the default settings (INIT)............................................................................................................................. 155

Updating the firmware (UPDATE)................................................................................................................................. 155

Checking the firmware version (VERSION)................................................................................................................. 155

TROUBLESHOOTING 156

When any problem appears................................................................. 156

If trouble occurs, first check the following:................................................................................................................ 156

Power, system, or remote control trouble................................................................................................................. 156

Audio trouble....................................................................................................................................................................... 158

Video trouble........................................................................................................................................................................ 161

FM/AM radio trouble (AM radio feature is not available for the U.K., Europe, Russia, Middle East and

Australia models)

................................................................................................................................................................. 162

DAB radio trouble (U.K., Europe, Russia, Middle East and Australia models)

................................................ 163

USB trouble........................................................................................................................................................................... 164

Network trouble.................................................................................................................................................................. 164

Bluetooth® trouble.............................................................................................................................................................. 166

Error indications on the front display................................................. 168

Error indications on the front display.......................................................................................................................... 168

APPENDIX 170

Updating the unit’s firmware via the network................................... 170

Firmware updates............................................................................................................................................................... 170

Updating the unit’s firmware via the network......................................................................................................... 171

Using wireless surround speakers (MusicCast Surround function)

................................................................................................................ 172

Using wireless surround speakers (MusicCast Surround function)................................................................... 172

Connecting to a network wirelessly.................................................... 174

Selecting a wireless network connection method.................................................................................................. 174

Setting up a wireless connection using the WPS button..................................................................................... 175

Setting up a wireless connection using an iOS device.......................................................................................... 175

Setting up a wireless connection by selecting from the list of available access points............................ 177

Setting up a wireless connection manually............................................................................................................... 178

Setting up a wireless connection by using the WPS PIN code........................................................................... 180

Input/output jacks and cables............................................................. 181

Video/audio jacks................................................................................................................................................................ 181

Video jacks............................................................................................................................................................................. 181

Audio jacks............................................................................................................................................................................ 182

Using presence speakers...................................................................... 183

Presence speaker layout................................................................................................................................................... 183

Installing the presence speakers in Front Height position.................................................................................. 183

Installing the presence speakers in Overhead position........................................................................................ 183

Using Dolby Enabled speakers as the presence speakers.................................................................................... 184

Glossary................................................................................................. 185

Glossary of audio information........................................................................................................................................ 185

Glossary of HDMI and video information................................................................................................................... 186

Glossary of network information................................................................................................................................... 187

Glossary of Yamaha technologies................................................................................................................................. 187

Supported devices and file formats.................................................... 188

Supported Bluetooth® devices....................................................................................................................................... 188

Supported USB devices..................................................................................................................................................... 188

Supported AirPlay devices............................................................................................................................................... 188

Supported file formats...................................................................................................................................................... 189

Video signal flow.................................................................................. 189

Video signal flow................................................................................................................................................................. 189

Video conversion table..................................................................................................................................................... 190

Additional information on HDMI......................................................... 191

HDMI Control and synchronized operations............................................................................................................ 191

Audio Return Channel (ARC)........................................................................................................................................... 192

HDMI signal compatibility............................................................................................................................................... 193

Trademarks........................................................................................... 194

Trademarks............................................................................................................................................................................ 194

Specifications........................................................................................ 195

Specifications........................................................................................................................................................................ 195

Default settings.................................................................................... 200

Default settings of the Option menu........................................................................................................................... 200

Default settings of the Setup menu............................................................................................................................. 200

Default settings of the ADVANCED SETUP menu.................................................................................................... 202

BEFORE USING THE UNIT

How to use this manual

When reading this manual, mind the following items.

• The illustrations of the main unit used in this manual are of the U.S.A. model, unless

otherwise specified.

• Some features are not available in certain regions.

• Due to product improvements, specifications and appearance are subject to

change without notice.

• This manual mainly explains operations using the menu displayed on the TV screen.

Operations with the TV screen menu are only available when your TV is connected

to the unit via HDMI.

• This manual explains operations using the supplied remote control.

• This manual describes all the “iPod touch”, “iPhone” and “iPad” as the “iPhone”.

“iPhone” refers to “iPod touch”, “iPhone” and “iPad”, unless otherwise specified.

WARNING:

Indicates precautions for the possibility of death or serious injury.

CAUTION:

Indicates precautions for the possibility of minor or moderate injury.

NOTICE:

Indicates precautions for use to avoid the possibility of malfunction/damage to the unit.

NOTE:

Indicates instructions and supplementary explanations for optimum use.

Checking the accessories

Check that the following accessories are supplied with the product.

£ AM antenna (Except for U.K., Europe, Russia,

Middle East and Australia models)

£ FM antenna (Except for U.K., Europe, Russia,

Middle East and Australia models)

* One of the above is supplied depending on

the region of purchase.

£ DAB/FM antenna (U.K., Europe, Russia,

Middle East and Australia models)

£ YPAO microphone

£ Power cable £ Remote control

* The supplied power cable varies depending

on the region of purchase.

£ Batteries (AAA, R03, UM-4) (x2)

£ Quick Start Guide

NOTE

Access the Yamaha Downloads site to download the latest Owner's Manual and Quick Start Guide.

http://download.yamaha.com/

Using the remote control

Insert the batteries in the remote control

Insert the batteries the right way round.

Operating range of the remote control

Point the remote control at the remote control sensor on the unit and remain within the

operating range shown in the following figure.

Within 6 m (20 ft)

30° 30°

FEATURES

What you can do with the unit

Supporting 2- to 7.1-channel

speaker system

According to the number of speakers that you are

using, you can enjoy your favorite acoustic spaces in

various styles.

• “Using 7.1/5.1.2-channel system” (p.21)

• “Using 5.1.2-channel system” (p.22)

• “Using 7.1-channel system” (p.23)

• “Using 5.1-channel system” (p.24)

• “Using 3.1.2-channel system” (p.25)

• “Using Virtual CINEMA FRONT” (p.26)

• “Playing back music in multiple rooms” (p.56)

Automatically optimizing the

speaker settings (YPAO)

YPAO function detects speaker connections, measures

the distances from them to your listening positions by

using YPAO microphone measurement, and then

automatically optimizes the speaker settings, such as

volume balance and acoustic parameters, to suit your

room (YPAO: Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic

Optimizer).

• “Optimizing the speaker settings automatically

(YPAO)” (p.42)

Enjoying sound field effects with

much presence

The unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs

and surround decoders that allow you to enjoy

playback sources with your favorite sound mode (such

as sound field effect or stereo playback).

• “Enjoying 3D sound fields (CINEMA DSP

3D)” (p.50)

• “Enjoying sound field effects optimized for the type of

content”

(p.

51)

• “Enjoying sound field effects without surround

speakers (Virtual CINEMA DSP)” (p.51)

• “Enjoying surround sound with headphones (SILENT

CINEMA)” (p.51)

• “Enjoying original sound (straight decode)” (p.52)

• “Enjoying multichannel playback without sound field

effects (surround decoder)”

(p.

52)

• “Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (Pure

Direct)” (p.

53)

• “Enhancing the bass (Extra Bass)” (p.54)

• “Playing back digitally compressed formats with

enriched sound (Compressed Music

Enhancer)”

(p.

54)

• “Enjoying Dolby Atmos

and DTS:X™” (p.55)

Wide variety of supported

content via network

When the unit is connected to a network, you can enjoy

the various kinds of content via network on the unit.

• “Playback of iTunes/iPhone music contents with

AirPlay” (p.83)

• “Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/

NAS)” (p.85)

• “Selecting an Internet radio station” (p.87)

• “Listening to a streaming service” (p.88)

Playing back content of various

devices

A number of HDMI jacks and various input/output jacks

on the unit allow you to connect video devices (such as

BD/DVD players), audio devices (such as CD players),

Bluetooth devices (such as smartphones), game

consoles, USB storage devices, and other devices. You

can play back content of them.

• “Selecting a frequency for reception” (p.66)

• “Playback Bluetooth

device music on the

unit”

(p.81)

• “Playback of USB storage device contents” (p.84)

Useful functions

The unit is equipped with the various useful functions.

The SCENE function allows you to select the input

source and settings registered to the corresponding

scene, such as sound program and Compressed

Music Enhancer on/off, with just one touch. When the

unit is connected to an HDMI Control-compatible TV

with an HDMI cable, you can control the unit (such as

power and volume) with TV remote control operations.

• “Selecting the input source and favorite settings with

one touch (SCENE)”

(p.

89)

•

“Registering a favorite content as shortcut” (p.92)

• “HDMI Control and synchronized

operations”

(p.191

)

• “Audio Return Channel (ARC)” (p.192)

Additional Features

The unit is equipped with the function connected with

speakers wirelessly. You can enjoy audio played back

on the unit using Bluetooth speakers/headphones.

Also, using devices that support the MusicCast

Surround function, the surround speakers and

subwoofer can be wireless.

• “Enjoying audio using Bluetooth

speakers/

headphones” (p.82)

• “Using wireless surround speakers (MusicCast

Surround function)” (p.172

)

Useful applications

Application: “AV SETUP GUIDE”

AV SETUP GUIDE is an application that assists

you with cable connections between AV Receiver

and playback devices as well as AV Receiver

setup. This app guides you through the various

settings such as speaker connections, TV and

playback device connections and selecting the

speaker system.

For details, search for “AV SETUP GUIDE” on the App

Store or Google Play.

Application: “AV CONTROLLER”

AV CONTROLLER is an application that assists

you with various operations of AV Receiver

without the remote control. This app allows you

not only to control the unit’s power and volume

but also to select the input source and start/stop

playback.

For details, search for “AV CONTROLLER” on the App

Store or Google Play.

Application: "MusicCast

CONTROLLER"

MusicCast CONTROLLER is an application that

allows you to link a MusicCast compatible device

to other MusicCast compatible devices in other

rooms and play them back simultaneously. This

app lets you use your smartphone or other mobile

device instead of the remote control to easily

select music to play back as well as configure the

unit and MusicCast compatible devices.

For details, search for “MusicCast CONTROLLER” on

the App Store or Google Play.

Part names and functions

Part names and functions of the front panel

The part names and functions of the front panel are as follows.

AUX

AUDIO

(CONNECT)

PHONES

TONE CONTROL

USB

SILENT

CINEMA

STRAIGHT

PROGRAM

YPAO MIC

INPUT

SCENE

MAIN ZONE

PURE DIRECT

VOLUME

INFO (WPS)ZONE 2

ZONE CONTROL

MEMORY

PRESET

FM AM

TUNING

C LD F G HE I KJ

A5 6

431 987

(U.S.A. model)

MAIN ZONE z key

Turns on/off (standby) the unit.

Standby indicator

Lights up when the unit is in standby mode under any of

the following conditions.

• HDMI Control is enabled (p.130)

• Standby Through is enabled (p.131)

• Network Standby is enabled (p.133)

• Bluetooth Standby is enabled (p.136)

ZONE 2 key

Enables/disables the audio output to Zone2 (p.59).

ZONE CONTROL key

Changes the zone (main zone or the Zone2) that is

controlled by the keys and knobs on the front panel

(p.59).

INFO (WPS) key

Selects the information displayed on the front display

(p.62).

Enters the wireless LAN connection setup (WPS button

configuration) by holding down for a few seconds (

p.175).

MEMORY

key

Registers radio stations as preset stations (p.67).

Registers Bluetooth, USB, or network content as a shortcut

by holding down for a few seconds (p.

PRESET keys

Select a preset radio station (p.67).

Recall Bluetooth, USB, or network content that is registered

as a shortcut (

93).

FM and AM keys (Except for U.K., Europe, Russia,

Middle East and Australia models)

FM and DAB keys (U.K., Europe, Russia, Middle East

and Australia models)

Switch between FM and AM (p.66) or FM and DAB

(p.71).

Front display

Displays information (p.14).

TUNING keys

Select the radio frequency (p.66).

Remote control sensor

Receives remote control signals (p.9).

PURE DIRECT key

Enables/disables the Pure Direct (p.53).

INPUT knob

Select an input source.

PHONES jack

For connecting headphones.

USB jack

For connecting a USB storage device (p.84).

TONE CONTROL key

Adjusts the level of high-frequency range (Treble) and low-

frequency range (Bass

) individually (p.96).

PROGRAM

keys

Select a sound program or a surround decoder (p.50).

STRAIGHT (CONNECT) key

Enables/disables the straight decode mode (p.52).

Enters the MusicCast network addition and the wireless

LAN setup by holding down for 5 seconds (p.

SCENE keys

Switch with one touch between multiple settings set using

the SCENE function. Also, turns on the unit when it is in

standby mode (p.89

AUX jack

For connecting devices, such as portable audio players

(p.33).

YPAO MIC jack

For connecting the supplied YPAO microphone (p.42).

VOLUME knob

Adjusts the volume.

NOTE

To use controls or jacks behind the front panel door, gently press the

bottom of the door to open it. Keep the door closed when not using

controls or jacks behind the front panel door.

Part names and functions of the front display

The part names and functions of the front display are as follows.

3 B

ENHANCER

ECO

OUT

DRC

SLEEP

STEREO

TUNED

VOL.

SBL SBR

MUTE VIRTUAL

ZONE

LINK

MASTER

FPRFPL

PARTY

YPAO

VOL.

1 5 7

0342 A B6 8

DC DG HFE I

HDMI

Lights up when HDMI signals are being input or output.

OUT1/OUT2

Indicates the HDMI OUT jacks currently outputting an

HDMI signal.

LINK MASTER

Lights up when the unit is the master device of the

MusicCast network.

Firmware update indicator

Lights up when a firmware update is available via the

network.

Bluetooth indicator

Light up while the unit is connected to a Bluetooth device.

CINEMA DSP

Lights up when CINEMA DSP 3D (p.50) is working.

SLEEP

Lights up when the sleep timer is on.

STEREO

Lights up when the unit is receiving a stereo FM radio

signal.

TUNED

Lights up when the unit is receiving an FM/AM radio station

signal.

PARTY

Lights up when the party mode (p.60) is enabled.

ZONE2

Lights up when audio output to Zone2 (p.59) is enabled.

A-DRC

Lights up when Adaptive DRC (p.97) is working.

Volume indicator

Indicates the current volume.

VIRTUAL

Lights up when the virtual processing is working (p.50) .

ECO

Lights up when the eco mode (p.149) is enabled.

Cursor indicators

Indicate the remote control cursor keys currently

operational.

Information display

Displays the current status (such as input name and sound

mode name). You can switch the information by pressing

INFO (p.

Wireless LAN indicator

Light up while the unit is connected to a wireless network

(p.174).

NOTE

This indicator may light up when the unit is added to the

MusicCast network. For details, see “Adding the unit to the

MusicCast network” (p.49).

ENHANCER

Lights up when Compressed Music Enhancer (

p.54) is

working.

YPAO VOL.

Lights up when YPAO Volume (p.96) is enabled.

Speaker indicators

Indicate speaker terminals from which signals are output.

A Front speaker (L)

S Front speaker (R)

D Center speaker

F Surround speaker (L)

G Surround speaker (R)

H Surround back speaker (L)

J Surround back speaker (R)

B Presence speaker (L)

N Presence speaker (R)

L Subwoofer

MUTE

Blinks when audio is temporarily muted.

Part names and functions of the rear panel

The part names and functions of the rear panel are as follows.

ANTENNA

AUDIO 4

AUDIO 5

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

COMPONENT VIDEO

COAXIAL

AUDIO 1

AUDIO 2

AUDIO 3

AV 1 AV 2

HDMI (

HDCP2.2

)

3 4 5 6 7

ARC

SURROUND CENTER FRONT

SURROUND BACK

ZONE2

BI-AMP

ZONE2

SPEAKERS

VIDEO

ZONE OUT

SUBWOOFER

FRONT

CENTER

SUR. BACK

SURROUND

PRE OUT

ZONE 2

TRIGGER OUT

REMOTE

12V

OUT

0.1A

F.PRESENCE

EXTRA SP1

EXTRA SP2

HDMI

OUT

RS-232C

AC IN

PHONO

GND

HDCP2.2

( )

NETWORK

(1 MOVIE) (5 STB) (6 GAME)

( 7 TV )

( 3 MUSIC )

( 2 RADIO )

(4 NET RADIO)

(8 SERVER)

dba

e g i

c c

m n o

pkl

(U.S.A. model)

▪ The area around the video/audio output jacks is marked in white

on the actual product to prevent improper connections.

REMOTE IN/OUT jacks

For connecting to an infrared signal receiver/emitter that

allows you to operate the unit and other devices from

another room (

58).

TRIGGER OUT jack

For connecting to a device that supports the trigger

function (p.

38).

Wireless antennas

For a wireless (Wi-Fi) connection to a network (p.174) and

a Bluetooth connection (p.81).

HDMI OUT

1–2 jacks

For connecting to HDMI-compatible TVs and outputting

video/audio signals (p.30). When using ARC, TV audio

signal can also be input through the

HDMI OUT 1 jack.

HDMI 1–7 jacks

For connecting to HDMI-compatible playback devices and

inputting video/audio signals (p.31).

ANTENNA

jacks

For connecting to the radio antennas (p.34).

NETWORK jack

For a wired connection to a network (p.36).

RS-232C terminal

This is a control expansion terminal for custom installation.

VOLTAGE SELECTOR

(Taiwan, Brazil and Central and South America models

only)

Selects the switch position according to your local voltage

(p.39).

AC IN jack

For connecting the supplied power cable (p.39).

AV jacks

AUDIO jacks

For connecting to video/audio playback devices and

inputting video/audio signals (

p.32).

PHONO jacks

For connecting to a turntable (p.32).

ZONE OUT jacks

For connecting to the external amplifier used in Zone2 and

for outputting audio (p.58).

PRE OUT jacks

For connecting to an external power amplifier (p.37).

SUBWOOFER jack

For connecting to a subwoofer (with built-in amplifier)

(p.20).

SPEAKERS terminals

For connecting to speakers (p.17).

Part names and functions of the remote control

The part names and functions of the supplied remote control are as follows.

PRESET

BAND TUNINGTUNING

MEMORY

RED GREEN

YELLOW

BLUE

POP-UP

/MENU

HOME

TOP

VOLUME

BLUETOOTH

NET USBTUNER

INPUT

PROGRAM

SUR. DECODE

BASS

ENHANCER

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

SCENE

4321

8765

HDMI OUT

PARTY

SLEEP

MAIN

ZONE 2

PRESET

BAND

TUNING

MEMORY

RED

GREEN

YELLOW

BLUE

POP-UP

/MENU

HOME

TOP

VOLUME

BLUETOOTH

NET

USB

TUNER

INPUT

PROGRAM

SUR. DECODE

BASS

ENHANCER

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

SCENE

HDMI OUT

PARTY

SLEEP

MAIN

ZONE 2

PRESET

BANDBAND TUNINGTUNING TUNINGTUNING

MEMORYMEMORY

RED GREEN

YELLOW

BLUE

POP-UP

/MENU

HOME

TOP

VOLUME

BLUETOOTH

NET USBTUNER

INPUT

PROGRAM

SUR. DECODE

BASS

ENHANCER

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

SCENE

4321

8765

HDMI OUT

PARTY

SLEEP

MAIN

ZONE 2

Remote control signal transmitter

Transmits infrared signals.

z (receiver power) key

Turns on/off (standby) the unit.

MAIN/ZONE 2 switch

Changes the zone that is controlled by the remote control

(p.59).

SLEEP key

Pressing this key repeatedly will specify the time (120 min,

90 min, 60 min, 30 min, off), in which the unit switches to

the standby mode.

PARTY key

Turns on/off the party mode (p.60).

SCENE keys

Switch with one touch between multiple settings set using

the SCENE function. Also, turn on the unit when it is in

standby mode (p.

89).

Input selection keys

Select an input source for playback.

NOTE

Presses NET repeatedly to select a desired network source.

8ADGHI External device operation keys

Let you perform playback operations when “USB” or “NET”

is selected as the input source, or control playback of the

HDMI Control-compatible playback device.

NOTE

The playback devices must support HDMI Control. Some HDMI

Control-compatible devices cannot be used.

PRESET keys

Select a preset radio station (p.67).

Recall Bluetooth, USB, or network content that is registered

as a shortcut (

93).

OPTION key

Displays the option menu (p.94).

SETUP key

Displays the setup menu (p.105).

ENTER/Cursor, RETURN keys

Operates the menu.

HELP key

In the on-screen menu, the description of a term in the

cursor position appears on the TV. This key is enabled

when the “?” icon is displayed on the on-screen menu.

Sound mode keys

Select a sound mode (p.50).

Playback operation keys

Controls playback of the external device.

HDMI OUT key

Selects HDMI OUT jacks to be used for video/audio output

(p.

PURE DIRECT key

Enables/disables the Pure Direct (p.53).

VOLUME keys

Adjust the volume.

MUTE key

Mutes the audio output.

PREPARATIONS

1 Connecting speakers

Names and functions of speakers

The names and functions of speakers connected to the unit are as follows.

9 9

E R

6 7

10° to 30° 10° to 30°

0.5 to 1 m

(1.6 to 3.3 ft)

0.5 to 1 m

(1.6 to 3.3 ft)

1.8 m (5.9 ft) 1.8 m (5.9 ft)

0.3 m (1 ft) or more

NOTE

Use this diagram as a reference for the ideal speaker layout for the unit. Your speaker layout does not need

to match the diagram exactly, since the YPAO function can be used to automatically optimize the speaker

settings (such as distances) to suit the actual speaker layout.

Speaker type Abbr. Function

Front (L/R)

1/2

Produce front channel sounds (stereo sounds).

Center

Produces center channel sounds (such as movie dialogue

and vocals).

Surround (L/R)

4/5

Produce surround channel sounds. Surround speakers

also produce surround back channel sounds when no

surround back speakers are connected.

Surround back (L/R)

6/7

Produce surround back channel sounds.

Presence (L/R)

E/R

Produce CINEMA DSP 3D effect sounds or heights

channel sounds of Dolby Atmos and DTS:X contents.

Subwoofer

Produces LFE (low-frequency effect) channel sounds and

reinforces the bass parts of other channels.

NOTE

The unit provides three layout patterns for presence speakers. You can choose a layout pattern that suits

your listening environment.

▪ Front Height

▪ Overhead

▪ Dolby Enabled SP

Speaker systems and speakers to be connected

Select the speaker layout for the number of speakers that you are using and place the

speakers and subwoofer in your room.

Speaker type

Speaker system

(the number of channels)

7.1/5.1.2 5.1 2.1

Front (L/R) 1/2

  

Center 3

 

Surround (L/R) 4/5



*3

Surround back (L/R) 6/7

*1

Presence (L/R) E/R

*2 *4

Subwoofer 9

  

If you have nine speakers, you can use the both surround back speakers and

presence speakers. In this case, the unit automatically changes the speakers to be

used, depending on the input signal and CINEMA DSP.

If you have seven speakers, use two of them as surround back speakers (*1) or

presence speakers (*2).

If you have five speakers, use two of them as surround speakers (*3) or presence

speakers (*4).

NOTE

▪ “5.1.2-channel” denotes “standard 5.1-channel plus 2 for overhead speaker channels”.

▪ When using surround back speakers, be sure to connect the surround back left and right speakers. Using

only one surround back speaker was discontinued.

▪ You can also connect up to 2 subwoofers (with built-in amplifier) to the unit.

Speaker requirements

Speakers and subwoofers to be connected to the unit must meet the following

requirements:

• Under its default settings, the unit is configured for 8-ohm speakers. When

connecting 6-ohm speakers, set the unit’s speaker impedance to “6 Ω MIN”. For

details, see the following:

– “Setting the speaker impedance” (p.19)

• Use a subwoofer with built-in amplifier.

NOTE

▪ Prepare the number of speakers according to your speaker system.

▪ Be sure to connect the front left and right speakers.

Setting the speaker impedance

Under its default settings, the unit is configured for 8-ohm speakers. When connecting

6-ohm speakers, set the speaker impedance to “6 Ω MIN”.

Before connecting speakers, connect the power cable to an AC

wall outlet.

While holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press MAIN

ZONE z.

(MAIN ZONE)

STRAIGHT

Check that “SP IMP.” is displayed on the front display.

ENHANCER

LINK

ECO

MASTER

OUT

YPAO

VOL.

DRC

SLEEP

STEREO

PARTY

TUNED

ZONE

3 B2 A

VOL .

FPR

SBL SB SBR

FPL

MUT E VIR TUAL

SP IMP.••8¬MIN

Press STRAIGHT to select “6 Ω MIN”.

Press MAIN ZONE z to set the unit to standby mode and remove

the power cable from the AC wall outlet.

You are now ready to connect the speakers.

Cable requirements

Use the following types of commercially-available cables to connect speakers to the

unit:

Speaker cables (the number of speakers

required)

Audio pin cable (for connecting a subwoofer)

–

How to connect speakers

Connecting the speaker

Connect a speaker cable between the negative (–) terminal of the unit and the

negative (–) terminal of the speaker, and between the positive (+) terminal of the unit

and the positive (+) unit of the speaker.

NOTICE

When connecting the speaker cables, take notice of the following:

▪ Prepare speaker cables in a place away from the unit, to avoid accidentally dropping wire strands into

the unit's interior which could result in a short circuit or malfunction of the unit.

▪ Improper connecting of the speaker cables may cause a short circuit and also damage the unit or the

speakers.

– Twist the bare wires of the speaker cables firmly together.

– Do not let the bare wires of the speaker cable touch one another.

– Do not let the bare wires of the speaker cable come into contact with the unit’s metal parts (rear panel

and screws).

NOTE

▪ Remove the unit’s power cable from an AC wall outlet before connecting the speakers.

▪ Be sure to connect the front left and right speakers.

▪ Under its default settings, the unit is configured for 8-ohm speakers. When connecting 6-ohm speakers,

set the unit’s speaker impedance to “6 Ω MIN”. For details, see the following:

–

“Setting the speaker impedance” (p.19)

Remove approximately 10 mm (3/8”) of insulation from the ends of

the speaker cable, and twist the bare wires of the cable firmly

together.

Loosen the speaker terminal.

Insert the bare wires of the cable into the gap on the side (upper

right or bottom left) of the terminal.

Tighten the terminal.

FRONT

+ (red)

- (black)

This completes the connection.

NOTE

▪ If “Check SP Wires” appears on the front display when the unit is turned on, turn off the unit, and then

confirm that the speaker cables are not short circuited.

▪ (U.S.A., Canada, China, Taiwan, Brazil, Central and South America and General models only)

When using a banana plug, tighten the speaker terminal and insert a banana plug into the end of the

terminal.

FRONT

Banana plug

Connecting the subwoofer

Use an audio pin cable to connect the subwoofer.

NOTE

Unplug the power cables of the unit and subwoofer from the AC wall outlets before connecting the

subwoofer.

ZONE OUT

ZONE 2

SUBWOOFER

FRONT

Audio pin cable

How to place speakers (speaker systems)

Using 7.1/5.1.2-channel system

This speaker system brings out the full performance of the unit and allows you to enjoy

a highly-natural 3-dimensional sound field with any contents. We recommend this

speaker system to have a full effect of Dolby Atmos or DTS:X contents.

NOTE

▪ The surround back speakers and presence speakers do not produce sounds simultaneously. The unit

automatically changes the speakers to be used, depending on the input signal and CINEMA DSP 3D.

▪ When installing the presence speakers on the ceiling above the listening position, or when using Dolby

Enabled speakers as the presence speakers, the presence speaker layout settings must be changed. For

details, see the following:

– “Setting the layout of the presence speakers” (p.113)

▪ You can also connect up to 2 subwoofers (with built-in amplifier) to the unit.

9 9

10° to 30°

0.5 to 1 m

(1.6 to 3.3 ft)

0.5 to 1 m

(1.6 to 3.3 ft)

1.8 m (5.9 ft)

0.3 m (1 ft) or more

SURROUND CENTER FRONT

SURROUND BACK

ZONE2

BI-AMP

ZONE2

SPEAKERS

ZONE OUT

SUBWOOFER

FRONT

CENTER

SUR. BACK

SURROUND

PRE OUT

ZONE 2

F.PRESENCE

EXTRA SP1

EXTRA SP2

9 9

4 RE

Using 5.1.2-channel system

To have a full effect of Dolby Atmos or DTS:X contents, we recommend this speaker

system. The presence speakers produce a natural 3-dimensional sound field including

overhead.

NOTE

▪ When installing the presence speakers on the ceiling above the listening position, or when using Dolby

Enabled speakers as the presence speakers, the presence speaker layout settings must be changed. For

details, see the following:

– “Setting the layout of the presence speakers” (p.113)

▪ You can also connect up to 2 subwoofers (with built-in amplifier) to the unit.

For Front Height of the presence speakers layout

9 9

E R

10° to 30° 10° to 30°

0.5 to 1 m

(1.6 to 3.3 ft)

0.5 to 1 m

(1.6 to 3.3 ft)

1.8 m (5.9 ft) 1.8 m (5.9 ft)

For Overhead of the presence speakers layout

9 9

E R

10° to 30°

SURROUND CENTER FRONT

SURROUND BACK

ZONE2

BI-AMP

ZONE2

SPEAKERS

ZONE OUT

SUBWOOFER

FRONT

CENTER

SUR. BACK

SURROUND

PRE OUT

ZONE 2

F.PRESENCE

EXTRA SP1

EXTRA SP2

9 9

Using 7.1-channel system

This speaker system allows you to enjoy extended surround sound using the surround

back speakers.

NOTE

You can also connect up to 2 subwoofers (with built-in amplifier) to the unit.

9 9

6 7

10° to 30° 10° to 30°

0.3 m (1 ft) or more

SURROUND CENTER FRONT

SURROUND BACK

ZONE2

BI-AMP

ZONE2

SPEAKERS

ZONE OUT

SUBWOOFER

FRONT

CENTER

SUR. BACK

SURROUND

PRE OUT

ZONE 2

F.PRESENCE

EXTRA SP1

EXTRA SP2

9 9

Using 5.1-channel system

This is a basic speaker layout recommended for enjoying surround sound.

NOTE

You can also connect up to 2 subwoofers (with built-in amplifier) to the unit.

10° to 30° 10° to 30°

SURR

OUND

SPEAKERS

ZONE OU

SUBW

OOFER

ONT

CENTE

SUR.

SURR

OUND

PRE OUT

ZONE

Using 3.1.2-channel system

We recommend this speaker layout when you cannot place speakers in the back of

the room. You can also enjoy Dolby Atmos or DTS:X content with this speaker system.

NOTE

▪ When installing the presence speakers to the ceiling above the listening position or using the Dolby

Enabled speakers as the presence speakers, configure your presence speaker layout. For details, see the

following:

– “Setting the layout of the presence speakers” (p.113)

▪ You can also connect up to 2 subwoofers (with built-in amplifier) to the unit.

E R

0.5 to 1 m

(1.6 to 3.3 ft)

0.5 to 1 m

(1.6 to 3.3 ft)

1.8 m (5.9 ft) 1.8 m (5.9 ft)

SURROUND CENTER FRONT

SURROUND BACK

ZONE2

BI-AMP

ZONE2

SPEAKERS

ZONE OUT

SUBWOOFER

FRONT

CENTER

SUR. BACK

SURROUND

PRE OUT

ZONE 2

F.PRESENCE

EXTRA SP1

EXTRA SP2

Using Virtual CINEMA FRONT

This speaker layout is recommended if you cannot place speakers in the back of the

room.

NOTE

▪ To use Virtual CINEMA FRONT, the speaker configuration settings must be changed. For details, see the

following:

– “Assigning speaker configuration” (p.41)

– “Setting the layout of the surround speakers” (p.112)

▪ You can also connect up to 2 subwoofers (with built-in amplifier) to the unit.

SURR

OUND

SPEAKERS

ZONE OU

SUBW

OOFER

ONT

CENTE

SUR.

SURR

OUND

PRE OUT

ZONE

Advanced speaker systems

Available configurations for advanced speaker systems

using the unit’s internal amplifier

In addition to the basic speaker systems, the unit also allows you to apply the following

speaker configurations to enhance your system.

• Using the four internal amplifiers for front speakers to have more high-quality sounds

(Bi-amp connection)

• Using the excess internal amplifiers for stereo speakers in another room (multi-zone

function)

To enjoy following systems, configure the necessary speaker settings in “Power Amp

Assign” in the “Setup” menu. For details, see the following:

• “Setting your speaker system” (p.110)

Main zone

Multi-zone Power Amp Assign

Output channel

(max)

Bi-amp

Surround back/

Presence

7 Surround back +1 (Zone2) 7.1 + 1Zone

7 Presence +1 (Zone2) 5.1.2 + 1Zone



5.1 BI-Amp

NOTE

For details on connecting speakers in another room (multi-zone function), see the following:

▪ “Connecting Zone2 speakers using the unit’s internal amplifier” (p.56)

7.1 + 1Zone

9 9

Main zone

Zone2

Speaker Connect to

FRONT

CENTER

SURROUND

EXTRA SP2

(not used)

SUBWOOFER 1-2

Zone2 speakers EXTRA SP1

NOTE

When Zone2 output is enabled, the surround back speakers in the main zone do not output sound. For

details on Zone2 output, see the following:

▪ “Controlling Zone2” (p.59)

5.1.2 + 1Zone

9 9

E R

Main zone

Zone2

Speaker Connect to

FRONT

CENTER

SURROUND

(not used)

EXTRA SP1

SUBWOOFER 1-2

Zone2 speakers EXTRA SP2

NOTE

When Zone2 output is enabled, the presence speakers in the main zone do not output sound. For details on

Zone2 output, see the following:

▪ “Controlling Zone2” (p.59)

5.1 BI-Amp

9 9

Bi-amp

Speaker Connect to

FRONT and EXTRA SP2 (bi-amp connection)

CENTER

SURROUND

(not used)

SUBWOOFER 1-2

Connecting front speakers that support bi-amp

connections

You can connect the front speakers that support bi-amp connections.

To enable the bi-amp function, configure the necessary speaker settings. For details,

see the following:

• “Assigning speaker configuration” (p.41)

• “Setting your speaker system” (p.110)

NOTICE

▪ Before making bi-amp connections, remove any brackets or cables that connect a woofer with a

tweeter. Refer to the instruction manual of the speakers for details. If you are not making bi-amp

connections, make sure that the brackets or cables are connected before connecting the speaker

cables.

1 2

SURROUND CENTER FRONT

SURROUND BACK

ZONE2

BI-AMP

ZONE2

SPEAKERS

F.PRESENCE

EXTRA SP1

EXTRA SP2

The unit (rear)

NOTE

▪ The following speakers cannot be connected simultaneously.

– Surround back speakers

– Bi-amp speakers

▪ The FRONT terminals and EXTRA SP2 terminals output the same signals.

2 Connecting a TV

HDMI connection with a TV

Connect a TV to the unit with an HDMI cable. If you connect a TV that supports ARC to

the unit, you can output video/audio to the TV or input TV audio to the unit.

ANTENNA

AUDIO 4

AUDIO 5

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

COMPONENT VIDEO

COAXIAL

AUDIO 1

AUDIO 2

AUDIO 3

AV 1 AV 2

ARC

VIDEO

ZONE OUT

FRONT

CENTER

SUR. BACK

PRE OUT

ZONE 2

TRIGGER OUT

REMOTE

12V

OUT

0.1A

HDMI

OUT

PHONO

GND

HDCP2.2

( )

(1 MOVIE) (5 STB)

( 7 TV )

( 3 MUSIC )

( 2 RADIO )

HDMI

ARC

HDMI

OUT

HDCP2.2

( )

HDMI

The unit (rear) HDMI OUT jack

HDMI input

About Audio Return Channel (ARC)

▪ ARC allows audio signals to travel both ways with a single HDMI cable. To use ARC, connect to the TV

using an HDMI cable that supports ARC.

NOTE

▪ If you connect a TV that supports HDMI Control to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can control the unit’s

power and volume with the TV’s remote control.

▪ To use HDMI Control and ARC, you need to configure the HDMI settings on the unit. For details on the

settings, see the following:

– “HDMI Control and synchronized operations” (p.191)

– “Audio Return Channel (ARC)” (p.192)

▪ If your TV does not support Audio Return Channel (ARC), a digital optical cable connection between the

TV and the unit is needed.

HDMI connection with another TV or a projector

The unit has two HDMI output jacks. If you connect another TV or a projector to the unit

with an HDMI cable, you can switch the TV (or projector) to be used for watching

videos with the remote control. For details, see the following:

• “Selecting an HDMI output jack” (p.62)

ANTENNA

AUDIO 4

AUDIO 5

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

COMPONENT VIDEO

COAXIAL

AUDIO 1

AUDIO 2

AUDIO 3

AV 1 AV 2

ARC

VIDEO

TRIGGER OUT

REMOTE

12V

OUT

0.1A

HDMI

OUT

PHONO

GND

HDCP2.2

( )

(1 MOVIE)

( 7 TV )

( 3 MUSIC )

( 2 RADIO )

HDMI

2 1

OUT

ARC

HDMI

( HDCP2.2 )

The unit (rear)

HDMI OUT 2 jack

HDMI input

TV (already connected)

Projector

NOTE

HDMI Control is not available on the HDMI OUT 2 jack.

3 Connecting playback devices

HDMI connection with a video device such as a

BD/DVD player

Connect a video device to the unit with an HDMI cable.

ANTENNA

AUDIO 4

AUDIO 5

COMPONENT VIDEO

AV 1 AV 2

HDMI (

HDCP2.2

)

3 4 5 6 7

ARC

SURROUND CENTER FRONT

SPEAKERS

VIDEO

ZONE OUT

SUBWOOFER

FRONT

CENTER

SUR. BACK

SURROUND

PRE OUT

ZONE 2

HDMI

OUT

HDCP2.2

( )

(1 MOVIE) (5 STB) (6 GAME)

( 2 RADIO )

HDMI

(

HDCP2.2

)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

HDMI

(1 MOVIE) (5 STB) (6 GAME)

The unit (rear)

HDMI OUT jack

HDMI 1–7 jacks

Video device

Connection other than HDMI with a playback device

VIDEO (component video) connection with a video

device

Connect a video device to the unit with a component video cable and a digital coaxial

cable.

Output jacks on video device

Input jacks on the unit

Video Audio

Composite video Digital coaxial

AV 1 (COMPONENT VIDEO +

COAXIAL)

ANTENNA

AUDIO 4

AUDIO 5

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

COMPONENT VIDEO

COAXIAL

AUDIO 1

AUDIO 2

AUDIO 3

AV 1 AV 2

ARC

VIDEO

ZONE OUT

FRONT

CENTER

SUR. BACK

PRE OUT

ZONE 2

TRIGGER OUT

REMOTE

12V

OUT

0.1A

HDMI

OUT

PHONO

GND

HDCP2.2

( )

(1 MOVIE) (5 STB)

( 7 TV )

( 3 MUSIC )

( 2 RADIO )

COMPONENT

VIDEO

COAXIAL

The unit (rear)

AV 1 (COMPONENT VIDEO) jack

AV 1 (COAXIAL) jack

Video device

Audio output

(digital coaxial)

Video output (component video)

NOTE

▪ This unit supports only the video signals of 480i and 576i (resolution).

▪ If the combination of video/audio input jacks available on the unit does not match your video device,

change its combination according to the output jacks of your device. For details, see the following:

– “Combining audio of another input source with video of the current input source” (p.143)

VIDEO (composite video) connection with a video

device

Connect a video device to the unit with a video pin cable and a stereo pin cable.

Output jacks on video device

Input jacks on the unit

Video Audio

Composite video Analog stereo AV 2 (VIDEO + AUDIO)

ANTENNA

AUDIO 4

AUDIO 5

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

COMPONENT VIDEO

COAXIAL

AUDIO 1

AUDIO 2

AUDIO 3

AV 1 AV 2

ARC

VIDEO

CENTER

TRIGGER OUT

REMOTE

12V

OUT

0.1A

HDMI

OUT

PHONO

GND

HDCP2.2

( )

(1 MOVIE)

( 7 TV )

( 3 MUSIC )

( 2 RADIO )

VIDEO

The unit (rear)

AV 2 (AUDIO) jacks

AV 2 (VIDEO) jack

Video output

(composite video)

Audio output

(analog stereo)

Video device

NOTE

If the combination of video/audio input jacks available on the unit does not match your video device, change

its combination according to the output jacks of your device. For details, see the following:

▪ “Combining audio of another input source with video of the current input source” (p.143)

AUDIO connection with an audio device such as a CD

player

Connect audio devices such as CD players and MD players to the unit. Depending on

the audio output jacks available on your audio device, choose one of the following

connections.

Audio output jacks on audio device Audio input jacks on the unit

Digital optical AUDIO 1–2 (OPTICAL)

Digital coaxial

AUDIO 3 (COAXIAL)

AV 1 (COAXIAL)

Analog stereo

AUDIO 4–5 (AUDIO)

AV 2 (AUDIO)

Turntable (PHONO) PHONO

ANTENNA

AUDIO 4

AUDIO 5

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

COMPONENT VIDEO

COAXIAL

AUDIO 1

AUDIO 2

AUDIO 3

AV 1 AV 2

HDMI (

3 4

ARC

VIDEO

ZONE OUT

SUBWOOFER

FRONT

CENTER

SUR. BACK SURROUND

PRE OUT

ZONE 2

TRIGGER OUT

REMOTE

12V

OUT

0.1A

HDMI

OUT

PHONO

GND

HDCP2.2

( )

(1 MOVIE) (5 STB) (6 GAME)

( 7 TV )

( 3 MUSIC )

( 2 RADIO )

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

PHONO

GND

PHONO

GND

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

L L

The unit

(rear)

PHONO jacks

Audio output

(either digital optical, digital coaxial, or

analog stereo)

Audio device

AV 1-2 jacks

AUDIO 1-5 jacks

Ground lead

Audio output (PHONO)

Turntable

NOTE

▪ The PHONO jack of the unit is compatible with an MM cartridge. To connect a turntable with a low-output

MC cartridge, use a boosting transformer.

▪ Connecting the turntable to the GND terminal of the unit may reduce noise in the signal.

▪ “AUDIO1” is set as TV audio input at the factory. If you have connected any external device to the AUDIO

1 jacks, use “TV Audio Input” in the “Setup” menu to change the TV audio input assignment. To use the

SCENE function, you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE (7). For details, see the

following:

–

“Setting the audio jack used for TV audio input” (p.130)

– “Registering a scene” (p.91)

Connecting to the jack on the front panel

Use the AUX jack on the front panel to temporarily connect devices such as portable

audio players to the unit.

CAUTION

▪ Before making a connection, stop playback on the device and turn down the volume on the unit. The

volume may be unexpectedly loud, and this could result in damage to hearing.

NOTE

You need to prepare the audio cable that matches the output jacks on your device.

AUX

AUDIO

(CONNECT)

PHONES

TONE CONTROL

USB

SILENT

CINEMA

STRAIGHT

PROGRAM

YPAO MIC

SCENE

VOLUME

The unit (front)

Portable audio player

If you select “AUX” as the input source by pressing INPUT, the audio played back on

the device will be output from the unit.

4 Connecting the radio antennas

Connecting the FM/AM antennas (Except for U.K.,

Europe, Russia, Middle East and Australia models)

Connect the supplied FM/AM antennas to the unit.

Fix the end of the FM antenna to a wall, and place the AM antenna on a flat surface.

ANTENNA

AUDIO 4

AUDIO 5

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

COMPONENT VIDEO

COAXIAL

AUDIO 1

AUDIO 2

AUDIO 3

AV 1 AV 2

HDMI (

HDCP2.2

)

3 4 5 6 7

ARC

SURROUND CENTER FRONT

SURROUND BACK

ZONE2

BI-AMP

SPEAKERS

VIDEO

ZONE OUT

SUBWOOFER

FRONT

CENTER

SUR. BACK

SURROUND

PRE OUT

ZONE 2

TRIGGER OUT

REMOTE

12V

OUT

0.1A

EXTRA SP2

HDMI

OUT

PHONO

HDCP2.2

( )

NETWORK

(1 MOVIE) (5 STB) (6 GAME)

( 7 TV )

( 3 MUSIC )

( 2 RADIO )

(4 NET RADIO)

(8 SERVER)

The unit (rear)

FM antenna AM antenna

Assembling and connecting the AM antenna

ReleaseHold down Insert

NOTE

▪ Unwind only the length of cable needed from the AM antenna unit.

▪ The wires of the AM antenna have no polarity.

Connecting the DAB/FM antenna (U.K., Europe,

Russia, Middle East and Australia models)

Connect the supplied DAB/FM antenna to the unit and fix the antenna ends to a wall.

AUDIO 4

AUDIO 5

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

COMPONENT VIDEO

COAXIAL

AUDIO 1

AUDIO 2

AUDIO 3

AV 1 AV 2

HDMI (

HDCP

3 4

ARC

VIDEO

ZONE OUT

SUBWOOFER

FRONT

CENTER

SUR. BACK

SURROUND

PRE OUT

ZONE 2

TRIGGER OUT

REMOTE

12V

OUT

0.1A

HDMI

OUT

PHONO

GND

HDCP2.2

( )

ANTENNA

(1 MOVIE) (5 STB) (6 GAME)

( 2 RADIO )

( 7 TV )

( 3 MUSIC )

The unit (rear)

DAB/FM antenna

NOTE

▪ The antenna should be stretched out horizontally.

▪ If you cannot obtain good reception on the radio, adjust the height, direction or placement of the DAB/FM

antenna.

5 Preparing for connecting to a network

Preparing for connecting to a network

The unit supports wired and wireless connections. Select a connection method

according to your network environment.

If you are using a router that supports DHCP in the wired connection, you do not need

to configure any network settings for the unit.

NOTE

You need to configure the network settings if your router does not support DHCP or if you want to configure

the network parameters manually. For details, see the following:

▪ “Setting the network parameters manually” (p.133)

To connect the unit to a wireless network, select one of the following methods to

configure the wireless network settings.

l Method using the MusicCast setting

When adding the unit to the MusicCast network, you can also configure the unit’s

wireless network settings at once. If you use MusicCast CONTROLLER, we

recommend the wireless connection to MusicCast network. For details, see the

following:

– “Adding the unit to the MusicCast network” (p.49)

l Other methods

For details, see the following:

– “Selecting a wireless network connection method” (p.174)

Connecting a network cable (wired connection)

Connect the unit to your router with a commercially-available STP network cable

(CAT-5 or higher straight cable).

You can enjoy Internet radio or music files stored on media servers, such as PCs and

Network Attached Storage (NAS), on the unit.

6 7

CENTER FRONT

SURROUND BACK

ZONE2

BI-AMP

ZONE2

SPEAKERS

F.PRESENCE

EXTRA SP1

EXTRA SP2

RS-232C

NETWORK

(4 NET RADIO)

(8 SERVER)

LAN

WAN

Network Attached Storage (NAS)

Internet

Modem

Wireless router

Network cable

The unit (rear)

NOTE

▪ If you are using a router that supports DHCP, you do not need to configure any network settings for the

unit, as the network parameters (such as the IP address) will be assigned automatically to it. You only

need to configure the network settings if your router does not support DHCP or if you want to configure the

network parameters manually. For details, see the following:

– “Setting the network parameters manually” (p.133)

▪ You can check whether the network parameters (such as IP address) are properly assigned to the unit.

For details, see the following:

– “Checking the network information on the unit” (p.132)

Preparing wireless antennas (wireless connection)

Stand the wireless antennas upright for connecting to the wireless network or a

Bluetooth device wirelessly.

For information on how to connect the unit to a wireless network, see the following:

• “Preparing for connecting to a network” (p.36)

NOTICE

▪ Do not apply excessive force on the wireless antenna. Doing so may damage the antenna.

6 Connecting other devices

Connecting an external power amplifier

When connecting an external power amplifier (pre-main amplifier) to enhance speaker

output, connect the input jacks of the power amplifier to the PRE OUT

jacks of the unit.

The same channel signals are output from the PRE OUT jacks as from their

corresponding SPEAKERS terminals.

CAUTION

▪ To prevent the generation of loud noises or abnormal sounds, make sure the followings before making

connections.

– Unplug the power cable of the unit and turn off the external power amplifier before connecting them.

– When using the PRE OUT jacks, do not connect speakers to the corresponding SPEAKERS

terminals.

– When using an external amplifier that does not have the volume control bypass, do not connect other

devices (except the unit) to the amplifier.

AV 2

HDMI (

HDCP2.2

)

1 2

3 4 5 6 7

SURROUND CENTER FRONT

SURROUND BACK

ZONE2

BI-AMP

ZONE2

SPEAKERS

VIDEO

ZONE OUT

SUBWOOFER

FRONT

CENTER

SUR. BACK SURROUND

PRE OUT

ZONE 2

F.PRESENCE

EXTRA SP1

EXTRA SP2

RS-232C

AC IN

NETWORK

(1 MOVIE) (5 STB) (6 GAME)

(4 NET RADIO)

(8 SERVER)

The unit (rear)

CENTER jack

Outputs center channel sounds.

SUR. BACK jacks

Output surround back channel sounds.

SURROUND jacks

Output surround channel sounds.

FRONT jacks

Output front channel sounds.

SUBWOOFER 1–2 jacks

For connecting a subwoofer with built-in amplifier.

Connecting a device compatible with the trigger

function

The trigger function can control an external device in conjunction with operating the

unit (such as powering on/off and input selection). If you have a Yamaha subwoofer

that supports a system connection or a device with a trigger input jack, you can use

the trigger function by connecting the external device to the TRIGGER OUT

jack with a

monaural mini-jack cable.

ANTENNA

AUDIO 4

AUDIO 5

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

COMPONENT VIDEO

COAXIAL

AUDIO 1

AUDIO 2

AUDIO 3

AV 1 AV 2

ARC

VIDEO

ZONE OUT

CENTER

ZONE 2

TRIGGER OUT

REMOTE

12V

OUT

0.1A

HDMI

OUT

PHONO

GND

HDCP2.2

( )

(1 MOVIE) (5 ST

( 7 TV )

( 3 MUSIC )

( 2 RADIO )

TRIGGER OUT

12V

0.1A

The unit (rear)

TRIGGER OUT jack

System connector

jack

Yamaha subwoofer that

supports a system connection

NOTE

You can configure the trigger function settings. For details, see the following:

▪ “Specifying the zone with which the TRIGGER OUT jack functions are synchronized” (p.148)

7 Plugging in the power cable

Plugging in the power cable

WARNING

(Taiwan, Brazil and Central and South America models only)

Make sure you set VOLTAGE SELECTOR of the unit BEFORE plugging the power cable into an AC wall

outlet. Improper setting of VOLTAGE SELECTOR may cause damage to the unit and create a potential

fire hazard.

Before plugging in the power cable

Set the switch position of VOLTAGE SELECTOR according to your local voltage. Voltages are AC 110–

120/220–240 V, 50/60 Hz.

SURROUND BACK

BI-AMP

ZONE2

F.PRESENCE

EXTRA SP1

EXTRA SP2

RS-232C

AC IN

NETWORK

ET RADIO)

220V

240V

110V

120V

VOLTAGE SELECTOR

The unit (rear) VOLTAGE SELECTOR

After all the connections are complete, plug in the power cable.

FRONT

SURROUND BACK

ZONE2

BI-AMP

ZONE2

SPEAKERS

F.PRESENCE

EXTRA SP1

EXTRA SP2

RS-232C

AC IN

NETWORK

(4 NET RADIO)

(8 SERVER)

The unit (rear)

To an AC wall outlet

8 Selecting the on-screen menu language

Selecting the on-screen menu language

Select the desired on-screen menu language.

Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit.

Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video from the

unit (HDMI OUT jack).

NOTE

When you turn on the unit for the first time, a message regarding the network setup appears. You

can switch the language on this message screen.

Press SETUP.

Use the cursor keys to select “System” and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys to select “Language” and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys to select the desired language.

To exit from the menu, press SETUP.

This completes the necessary settings.

NOTE

The information on the front display is provided in English only.

9 Configuring the necessary speaker settings

Assigning speaker configuration

If you use any of the following speaker configurations, perform the following procedure

to configure the corresponding speaker settings manually before performing YPAO.

• Using the bi-amp connection (playing back more high-quality sounds with bi-amp

connections)

• Using the Zone2 speakers

• Using the surround speakers for front 5.1-channel system (Virtual CINEMA FRONT)

• Using the presence speakers for Dolby Atmos or DTS:X playback

NOTE

For details on the speaker configurations, see the following:

▪ “Connecting front speakers that support bi-amp connections” (p.29)

▪ “Playing back music in multiple rooms” (p.56)

▪ “Using Virtual CINEMA FRONT” (p.26)

▪ “Presence speaker layout” (p.183)

Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit.

Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video from the

unit (HDMI OUT jack).

NOTE

If you turn on the unit for the first time, the message regarding the network setup appears. For now,

press RETURN and proceed to Step 3.

Press SETUP.

Use the cursor keys to select “Speaker” and press ENTER.

Configure the corresponding speaker settings.

▪ Using bi-amp connections or Zone2 speakers, select your speaker

system in “

Power Amp Assign

”. For details, see the following:

– “Setting your speaker system” (p.110)

▪ Using the surround speakers for front 5.1-channel system (Virtual

CINEMA FRONT), select your surround speaker layout in “Configuration”.

For details, see the following:

– “Setting the layout of the surround speakers” (p.112)

▪ Using the presence speakers for Dolby Atmos or DTS:X playback, select

your presence speaker layout in “

Configuration”. For details, see the

following:

–

“Setting the layout of the presence speakers” (p.113)

To exit from the menu, press SETUP.

This completes the speaker settings.

Optimizing the speaker settings automatically

(YPAO)

The Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) function detects speaker

connections, measures the distances from them to your listening position(s), and then

automatically optimizes the speaker settings, such as volume balance and acoustic

parameters, to suit your room.

NOTE

▪ Use YPAO after connecting a TV and speakers to the unit.

▪ Configure the corresponding speaker settings manually before performing YPAO. For details on the

settings, see the following:

– “Assigning speaker configuration” (p.41)

▪ During the measuring process, test tones are output at high volume, and you cannot adjust the volume.

▪ During the measuring process, keep the room as quiet as possible and do not stand between the

speakers and the YPAO microphone for accurate measurement.

▪ Do not connect headphones.

Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit.

Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video from the

unit (HDMI OUT jack).

Turn on the subwoofer and set the volume to half. If the crossover

frequency is adjustable, set it to maximum.

VOLUME HIGH CUT

CROSSOVER/

MIN MAXMIN MAX

Place the YPAO microphone at your listening position and

connect it to the YPAO MIC jack on the front panel.

Place the YPAO microphone at your listening position (same height as

your ears). We recommend the use of a tripod as a microphone stand.

You can use the tripod screws to stabilize the microphone.

4 5

The unit (front)

Ear height

The following screen appears on the TV.

NOTE

▪ To cancel the operation, disconnect the YPAO microphone before starting the measurement.

▪ To configure the power amplifier assignment setting, press RETURN and select “Speaker” in the

“Setup” menu. For details, see the following:

– “Setting your speaker system” (p.110)

If the measuring option is desired, use the Cursor keys to select

“Multi Measure” and press ENTER to check the box.

NOTE

▪ If you perform the multi measure, the speaker settings will be optimized for you to enjoy

surround sound in a wider space.

▪ For details on the multi measure, see the following:

– “YPAO measuring at multiple listening positions (multi measure)” (p.44)

To start the measurement, press ENTER.

The measurement will start in 10 seconds. Press ENTER to start the

measurement immediately.

The following screen appears on the TV when the measurement finishes.

Warning message (if available)

NOTE

▪ To stop the measurement temporarily, press RETURN.

▪ If any error message or warning message appears, see the following:

– “Error messages from YPAO” (p.47)

– “Warning messages from YPAO” (p.48)

Confirm the results displayed on the screen.

NOTE

To check the measurement results specifically, select “Measurement result” and press ENTER. For

details, see the following:

▪ “Checking the YPAO measurement results” (p.45)

Use the cursor keys to select “Save” and press ENTER.

The adjusted speaker settings are applied.

NOTE

To finish the measurement without applying the result, select “Cancel”.

Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the unit.

This completes optimization of the speaker settings.

NOTICE

▪ The YPAO microphone is sensitive to heat, so should not be placed anywhere where it could be

exposed to direct sunlight or high temperatures (such as on top of AV equipment).

NOTE

“YPAO Volume” in the “Option” menu is automatically enabled after the YPAO measurement. Then, the high-

and low-frequency levels are automatically adjusted according to the volume so that you can enjoy natural

sounds even at low volume. For details on “

YPAO Volume”, see the following:

▪ “Adjusting the high- and low-frequency levels automatically according to the volume” (p.96

)

YPAO measuring at multiple listening positions

(multi measure)

Select “Multi Measure” option if you will have several listening positions or if you want

others to enjoy surround sound. You can take measurements at up to 8 different

positions in the room. The speaker settings will be optimized to suit the area defined

by those positions.

First place the YPAO microphone at the listening position you will be seated most

frequently.

a b

d e

bac

Single measure

Multi measure (5 listening

positions)

Multi measure (1 listening

position + front/back/left/right)

Multi measure (2 listening

positions + front/back)

The following screen appears on the TV when the measurement at the first position

finishes.

Move the YPAO microphone to the next listening position and press ENTER. And then,

repeat it until measurements at all listening positions (up to 8) have been taken. When

the measurements at the positions you want to measure are completed, use the cursor

keys to select “Skip” and press ENTER.

Checking the YPAO measurement results

You can check the YPAO measurement results.

After the measurement, use the cursor keys to select

“Measurement result” and press ENTER.

NOTE

You can also check the previous measurement results in the “Setup” menu. For details, see the

following:

▪ “Reloading the previous YPAO adjustments” (p.116)

The following screen appears.

Measurement result items

Measurement result details

Use the cursor keys to select an item.

Wiring

Polarity of each speaker

Reverse: The speaker cable may be connected with the reverse

polarity (+/-).

Size

Size of each speaker (cross-over frequency of the subwoofer)

Large: The speaker can reproduce low-frequency signals

effectively.

Small: The speaker cannot reproduce low-frequency signals

effectively.

Distance

Distance from the listening position to each speaker

Level

Output level adjustment for each speaker

To finish checking the results and return to the previous screen,

press RETURN.

Reloading the previous YPAO adjustments

When the speaker settings you have configured manually are not suitable, follow the

procedure below to discard the manual settings and reload the previous YPAO

adjustments.

Press SETUP.

Use the cursor keys to select “Speaker” and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys to select “YPAO Result” and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys to select “Setup Reload” and press ENTER.

Press SETUP.

This completes the settings.

NOTE

For details, see the following:

▪ “Reloading the previous YPAO adjustments” (p.116)

Error messages from YPAO

If any error message is displayed during the measurement, resolve the problem and

perform YPAO again.

Error message

TV screen

Error message Remedy

ERROR 1

Front speakers are not

detected.

Exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then check the speaker

connections.

ERROR 2

One of the surround speakers

cannot be detected.

ERROR 3

One of the front presence

speakers cannot be detected.

ERROR 4

One of the surround back

speakers cannot be detected.

ERROR 5

The noise is too loud.

Keep the room quiet and retry YPAO. If you select “Proceed”,

YPAO takes the measurement again and ignores any noise

detected.

ERROR 6

Surround back speakers are

connected, but no surround

speakers are connected.

Surround speakers need to be connected in order to use

surround back speakers. Exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then

reconnect the speakers.

ERROR 7

The YPAO microphone has

been removed.

Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack firmly

and retry YPAO.

ERROR 8

The YPAO microphone cannot

detect test tones.

Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack firmly

and retry YPAO. If this error occurs repeatedly, contact the

nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center.

ERROR 9

Canceled by user operation

Retry or exit YPAO as necessary. To exit the YPAO, use the

cursor keys to select “

Quit” and press ENTER.

ERROR 10

An internal error has occurred.

Exit YPAO, and turn off and on the unit. If this error occurs

repeatedly, contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or

service center.

NOTE

▪ To exit the YPAO measurement for resolving the problem, use the cursor keys to select “Quit” and press

ENTER.

▪ For the ERROR 5 and ERROR 9 messages only, you can proceed with the current YPAO measurement.

Use the cursor keys to select “Proceed” and press ENTER.

▪ To retry the YPAO measurement from beginning, use the cursor keys to select “Retry” and press ENTER.

Warning messages from YPAO

If a warning message is displayed after the measurement, you can still apply the

measurement results by following on-screen instructions.

However, we recommend you perform YPAO again in order to use the unit with the

optimal speaker settings.

Warning message

TV screen

Warning message Remedy

WARNING 1

A speaker cable may be

connected with the reverse

polarity (+/-).

Use the cursor keys to select “Measurement result” and press

ENTER, and then select “Wiring” in “Measurement result”.

Check the cable connections (+/-) of the speaker identified by

“Reverse”.

If the speaker is connected incorrectly:

Turn off the unit, reconnect the speaker cable.

If the speaker is connected correctly:

Depending on the type of speakers or room environment, this

message may appear even if the speakers are connected

correctly. In this case, you can ignore the message.

WARNING 2

A speaker is placed more than

24 m (80 ft) from the listening

position.

Use the cursor keys to select “

Measurement result” and press

ENTER, and then select “Distance

” in “Measurement result

”.

Check the speaker identified by “>24.00m (>80.0ft)

”. Exit

YPAO, turn off the unit, and place the problem speaker within

24 m (80 ft) of the listening position.

WARNING 3

There are significant volume

differences between the

speakers.

Use the cursor keys to select “Measurement result” and press

ENTER, and then select “Level” in “Measurement result”.

Check the speaker identified by “

>+10.0dB” or “<-10.0dB”.

Then, check the usage environment and cable connections

(+/-) of each speaker, and the volume of the subwoofer. If there

is any problem, exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then reconnect

speaker cable or correct the speaker positions. We

recommend using the same speakers or speakers with

specifications that are as similar as possible.

10 Setting MusicCast

What is MusicCast

MusicCast is a brand new wireless musical solution from Yamaha, allowing you to

share music among all of your rooms with a variety of devices. You can enjoy music

from your smartphone, PC, NAS drive and music streaming service anywhere in your

house with one easy-to-use application. For more details and a lineup of MusicCast

compatible products, refer to the following site:

http://www.yamaha.com/musiccast/

• Seamlessly control all MusicCast compatible devices with the dedicated application

“MusicCast CONTROLLER”.

• Link a MusicCast compatible device to another device in a different room and play

them back simultaneously.

• Play back music from music streaming services. (The compatible music streaming

services may differ depending on your region and product).

• Configure wireless network settings of MusicCast compatible devices.

Using MusicCast CONTROLLER

To use the network features on the MusicCast compatible device, you need the

dedicated application “MusicCast CONTROLLER” for the operation. Search for the

free application “MusicCast CONTROLLER” on the App Store or Google Play and

install it to your device.

Adding the unit to the MusicCast network

Perform the following procedure to add the unit to the MusicCast network. You can

also configure the unit’s wireless network settings at once.

NOTE

The SSID and security key for your network will be needed.

Tap the “MusicCast CONTROLLER” application icon on your

mobile device and tap “Setup”.

NOTE

If you have already connected other MusicCast compatible devices to the network, tap “Settings”

and then “Add New Device”.

Operate the “MusicCast CONTROLLER” application following the

on screen instructions, then hold down

CONNECT on the front

panel of the unit for 5 seconds.

CONNECT

Operate the “MusicCast CONTROLLER” application following the

onscreen instructions to set up the network.

This completes adding the unit to the MusicCast network and the network settings.

NOTE

▪ AirPlay and DSD audio cannot be delivered.

▪ When the Pure Direct is enabled, input sources other than the network sources, Bluetooth and USB

cannot be delivered.

▪ If you configure the unit's wireless settings with this method, the wireless LAN indicator of the front display

lights up when the unit is connecting to a network (even if a wired connection is used).

▪ You can interlock the power of MusicCast devices with the power of the unit (the MusicCast master). For

details on the settings, see the following:

– “Setting the power interlock from the unit to MusicCast compatible devices” (p.135)

ENJOYING SOUND

Enjoying sound field effects

Select your favorite sound mode

The unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs and surround decoders that

allow you to enjoy playback sources with your favorite sound mode (such as sound

field effect or stereo playback).

PRES ET

BAND TUNINGTUNING

MEMORY

RED GREEN

YELLOW

BLUE

POP-UP

/MENU

HOME

TOP

VOLUME

BLUETOOTH

NET USBTUNER

INPUT

PROGR AM

SUR. DECODE

BASS

ENHANCER

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

SCENE

4321

8765

HDMI OUT

PARTY

SLEEP

MAIN

ZONE 2

PRES ET

BAND

TUNING

MEMORY

RED

GREEN

YELLOW

BLUE

POP-UP

/MENU

HOME

TOP

VOLUME

BLUETOOTH

NET

USB

TUNER

INPUT

PROGR AM

SUR. DECODE

BASS

ENHANCER

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

SCENE

HDMI OUT

PARTY

SLEEP

MAIN

ZONE 2

PRES ET

BANDBAND TUNINGTUNING TUNINGTUNING

MEMORYMEMORY

RED GREEN

YELLOW

BLUE

POP-UP

/MENU

HOME

TOP

VOLUME

BLUETOOTH

NET USBTUNER

INPUT

PROGR AM

SUR. DECODE

BASS

ENHANCER

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

SCENE

4321

8765

HDMI OUT

PARTY

SLEEP

MAIN

ZONE 2

INPUT

PURE DIRECT

SCENE

4321

8765

HDMI OUT

PARTY

SLEEP

MAIN

ZONE 2

INPUT

URE DIRE

HDMI OU

PARTY

LEEP

MAIN

ZONE 2

INPUT

PURE DIRECT

SCENE

4321

8765

HDMI OUT

PARTY

SLEEP

MAIN

ZONE 2

BAND TUNINGTUNING

MEMORY

VOLUME

PROGRAM

SUR. DECODE

BASS

ENHANCER

STRAIGHT

AND T

NIN

MEM

UR. DE

ODE

ENHAN

TRAI

BANDBAND TUNINGTUNING TUNINGTUNING

MEMORYMEMORY

VOLUME

PROGRAM

SUR. DECODE

BASS

ENHANCER

STRAIGHT

INPU

SCENE

HDMI OU

PART

SLEEP

MAI

ZONE

BAND

BBB

ANANAN

DDD

TUNING

TTT

UUU

NIN

NINNINNIN

GGG

TUNING

TTT

UUU

NIN

NINNINNIN

GGG

MEMORY

MEMEME

MMM

OOO

RRR

YYY

OLUME

PURE DIRECT

ENHANCER

SUR. DECODE

BASS

STRAIGHT

PROGRAM

NOTE

▪ The sound mode can be applied separately to each input source.

▪ You can check which speakers are currently outputting sound by looking at the speaker indicators on the

front display.

Enjoying 3D sound fields (CINEMA DSP 3D)

The unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs that utilize Yamaha's original

DSP technology (CINEMA DSP 3D). It allows you to easily create sound fields like

actual movie theaters or concert halls in your room and enjoy natural three-

dimensional sound fields.

ENHANCER

LINK

ECO

MASTER

OUT

YPAO

VOL.

DRC

PARTY

TUNED

ZONE

3 B2 A

FPR

SBL SB SBR

FPL

MUT E VIR TUAL

SLEEP

STEREO

VOL .

Sci-Fi

Sound program category

“CINEMA DSP” lights up

Sound program

NOTE

▪ You can adjust the sound field effect level. For details, see the following:

– “Adjusting the sound field effect level” (p.120)

▪ The sound mode can be applied separately to each input source.

▪ We recommend using presence speakers in order to experience the full effect of the stereoscopic sound

fields. However, even when no presence speakers are connected, the unit creates Virtual Presence

Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and surround speakers to produce stereoscopic sound fields.

▪ If a multichannel source (6.1/7.1-channel) is input when no surround back speakers are connected, the

unit creates Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) using the surround speakers to add a sense of depth

to the rear sound field.

▪ When VPS or VSBS is working, “VIRTUAL” lights up in the front display.

Enjoying sound field effects optimized for the type of

content

The unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs.

You can enjoy playback sources with your favorite sound mode, such as with a sound

field effect added or with stereo playback.

• We recommend a sound program in the “MOVIE” category to enjoy video content.

• We recommend a sound program in the “MUSIC” category to enjoy music content.

For details on the sound programs, see the following:

• “Selecting sound programs” (p.119)

NOTE

You can select a sound program by pressing PROGRAM.

Enjoying sound field effects without surround

speakers (Virtual CINEMA DSP)

If you select one of the sound programs (except 2ch Stereo and 7ch Stereo) when no

surround speakers are connected, the unit automatically creates the surround sound

field using the front speakers.

NOTE

When Virtual CINEMA DSP is working, “VIRTUAL” lights up on the front display.

Enjoying surround sound with 5 speakers placed in

front (Virtual CINEMA FRONT)

You can enjoy the surround sound even when the surround speakers are placed in

front.

When “Layout” in “Surround” in the “Setup” menu is set to “Front”, the unit creates the

virtual surround speakers in the rear side to allow you to enjoy multichannel surround

sound with the 5 speakers placed in the front.

NOTE

▪ For details on the settings, see the following:

– “Setting the layout of the surround speakers” (p.112)

▪ When Virtual CINEMA FRONT is working, “VIRTUAL” lights up on the front display.

Enjoying surround sound with headphones (SILENT

CINEMA)

You can enjoy surround or sound field effects, like a multichannel speaker system, with

stereo headphones by connecting the headphones to the PHONES jack and selecting

a sound program or a surround decoder.

Enjoying unprocessed playback

Enjoying original sound (straight decode)

When STRAIGHT is pressed and the straight decode mode is enabled, the unit

produces stereo sound from the front speakers for 2-channel sources such as CDs,

and produces unprocessed multichannel sounds for multichannel sources.

LINK

ECO

MASTER

OUT

DRC

ZONE

3 B2 A

FPR

SBL SB SBR

FPL

MUT E VIR TUAL

SLEEP

STEREO

PARTY

TUNED

YPAO

VOL.

ENHANCER

VOL .

STRAIGHT

Each time you press the key, the straight decode mode is enabled or disabled.

NOTE

▪ When surround back speakers are used, the unit produces 7.1-channel sound for 5.1-channel sources.

▪ If “Layout” in “Surround” in the “Setup” menu is set to “Front”, Virtual CINEMA FRONT works when

multichannel source is played back. For details, see the following:

– “Setting the layout of the surround speakers” (p.112)

– “Enjoying surround sound with 5 speakers placed in front (Virtual CINEMA FRONT)” (p.51)

Enjoying multichannel playback without sound field

effects (surround decoder)

Press SUR. DECODE to select a surround decoder. The surround decoder enables

multichannel playback from 2-channel sources without sound field effects.

PRES ET

BAND TUNINGTUNING

MEMORY

RED GREEN

YELLOW

BLUE

POP-UP

/MENU

HOME

TOP

VOLUME

BLUETOOTH

NET USBTUNER

INPUT

PROGR AM

SUR. DECODE

BASS

ENHANCER

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

SCENE

4321

8765

HDMI OUT

PARTY

SLEEP

MAIN

ZONE 2

PRES ET

BAND

TUNING

MEMORY

RED

GREEN

YELLOW

BLUE

POP-UP

/MENU

HOME

TOP

VOLUME

BLUETOOTH

NET

USB

TUNER

INPUT

PROGR AM

SUR. DECODE

BASS

ENHANCER

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

SCENE

HDMI OUT

PARTY

SLEEP

MAIN

ZONE 2

PRES ET

BANDBAND TUNINGTUNING TUNINGTUNING

MEMORYMEMORY

RED GREEN

YELLOW

BLUE

POP-UP

/MENU

HOME

TOP

VOLUME

BLUETOOTH

NET USBTUNER

INPUT

PROGR AM

SUR. DECODE

BASS

ENHANCER

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

SCENE

4321

8765

HDMI OUT

PARTY

SLEEP

MAIN

ZONE 2

BAND TUNINGTUNING

MEMORY

VOLUME

PROGRAM

SUR. DECODE

BASS

ENHANCER

STRAIGHT

AND T

NIN

MEM

UR. DE

ODE

ENHAN

TRAI

BANDBAND TUNINGTUNING TUNINGTUNING

MEMORYMEMORY

VOLUME

PROGRAM

SUR. DECODE

BASS

ENHANCER

STRAIGHT

BAND

BBB

ANANAN

DDD

TUNING

TTT

UUU

NIN

NINNINNIN

GGG

TUNING

TTT

UUU

NIN

NINNINNIN

GGG

MEMORY

MEMEME

MMM

OOO

RRR

YYY

OLUME

PROGRAM

BASS

SSSS

ENHANCER

ENHA

STRAIGHT

SUR. DECODE

ENHANCER

LINK

ECO

MASTER

OUT

YPAO

VOL.

DRC

SLEEP

STEREO

PARTY

TUNED

ZONE

3 B2 A

SBL SB SBR

MUT E VIR TUA L

VOL .

†‡ Dsur

FPL FP R

“SUR. DECODE” appears

Each time you press the key, the surround decoder changes.

NOTE

▪ You can also change the surround decoder in “Surround Decoder” in the “Setup” menu. For details, see

the following:

– “Selecting the surround decoder used in the program” (p.123)

▪ For details on each decoder, see the following:

– “Glossary of audio decoding format” (p.185)

▪ You can adjust the surround decoder parameters in “Surround Decoder” in the “Setup” menu. For details,

see the following:

– “Adjusting the center localization (broadening effect) of the front sound field” (p.124)

– “Setting the use of Center Spread” (p.124)

▪ The selected surround decoder may not work for some input sources.

▪ We recommend Dolby Surround while network streaming is Dolby contents.

▪ When the Dolby Surround decoder or the Neural:X decoder is selected, virtual surround processing (such

as Virtual CINEMA FRONT) does not work. For details, see the following:

– “Enjoying sound field effects without surround speakers (Virtual CINEMA DSP)” (p.51)

– “Enjoying surround sound with 5 speakers placed in front (Virtual CINEMA FRONT)” (p.51)

Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (Pure Direct)

When PURE DIRECT is pressed and the direct playback mode is enabled, the unit

plays back the selected source with the least circuitry. It allows you to enjoy Hi-Fi

sound quality.

ENHANCER

LINK

ECO

MASTER

OUT

YPAO

VOL.

DRC

SLEEP

STEREO

PARTY

TUNED

ZONE

3 B2 A

FPR

FPL

MUT E VIR TUAL

VOL .

PURE DIRECT

SBL SBR

Each time you press the key, the direct playback mode is enabled or disabled.

NOTE

When the Pure Direct is enabled, the following functions are not available.

▪ Selecting sound programs

▪ Using the multi-zone function

▪ Adjusting the tone control

▪ Operating the on-screen “Setup” and “Option” menus

▪ Viewing information on the front display (when not in operation)

Enjoying enhanced bass sound

Enhancing the bass (Extra Bass)

Press BASS to enable Extra Bass and enjoy enhanced bass sound, regardless of the

size of the front speakers and the presence or absence of a subwoofer.

Each time you press the key, Extra Bass is enabled or disabled.

NOTE

You can also use “Extra Bass” in the “Option” menu to enable/disable Extra Bass. For details, see the

following:

▪ “Setting the use of Extra Bass” (p.99)

Enjoying enhanced compressed music

Playing back digitally compressed formats with

enriched sound (Compressed Music Enhancer)

Press ENHANCER to enable Compressed Music Enhancer and add depth and

breadth to the sound, allowing you to enjoy a dynamic sound close to the original

sound before it was compressed. This function can be used along with any other

sound modes.

LINK

ECO

MASTER

OUT

DRC

SLEEP

STEREO

PARTY

TUNED

ZONE

3 B2 A

FPR

SBL SB SBR

FPL

MUT E VIR TUAL

YPAO

VOL.

VOL .

Enhancer On

ENHANCER

“ENHANCER” lights up

Each time you press the key, Compressed Music Enhancer is enabled or disabled.

NOTE

▪ Compressed Music Enhancer does not work on the following audio sources.

– Signals whose sampling frequency is over 48 kHz

– DSD audio

▪ You can also use “Enhancer” in the “Option” menu to enable/disable Compressed Music Enhancer. For

details, see the following:

– “Setting Compressed Music Enhancer” (p.98)

Enjoying Dolby Atmos® and DTS:X™

Playing back Dolby Atmos or DTS:X content creates realistic sound that comes from

every direction, including overhead. To receive the full effect of Dolby Atmos or DTS:X

content, we recommend a speaker system with presence speakers.

NOTE

For details on the speaker system with the presence speakers, see the following:

▪ “Using 7.1/5.1.2-channel system” (p.21)

▪ “Using 5.1.2-channel system” (p.22)

About Dolby Atmos

▪ Dolby Atmos contents are decoded as Dolby TrueHD or Dolby Digital Plus in the following situations.

(Dolby Atmos PCM format is always decoded as Dolby Atmos.)

– Neither surround back nor presence speakers are used.

– Headphones are used (2-channel playback).

▪ When the Dolby Atmos decoder is selected, virtual surround processing (such as Virtual CINEMA

FRONT) does not work. For details, see the following:

– “Enjoying sound field effects without surround speakers (Virtual CINEMA DSP)” (p.51)

– “Enjoying surround sound with 5 speakers placed in front (Virtual CINEMA FRONT)” (p.51)

About DTS:X™

▪ When DTS:X contents are played back, you can adjust the volume of dialogue sounds in “DTS

Dialogue Control

” in the “

Option” menu. For details, see the following:

– “Adjusting the volume of dialogue sound during DTS:X™ playback” (p.97)

▪ When the DTS:X decoder is selected, virtual surround processing (such as Virtual CINEMA FRONT)

does not work. For details, see the following:

– “Enjoying sound field effects without surround speakers (Virtual CINEMA DSP)” (p.51)

– “Enjoying surround sound with 5 speakers placed in front (Virtual CINEMA FRONT)” (p.51)

Enjoying music in multiple rooms

Playing back music in multiple rooms

The multi-zone function allows you to play back different input sources in the room

where the unit is installed (Main zone) and in another room (Zone2).

For example, while you are watching TV in the living room (Main zone), another person

can listen to radio in the study room (Zone2).

Two methods for connecting the device that will be used in Zone2 to the unit are

available; using the unit’s internal amplifier or using an external amplifier. When using

an external amplifier, you can select 7.1/5.1.2-channel speaker system in Main zone.

• “Connecting Zone2 speakers using the unit’s internal amplifier” (p.56)

• “Connecting Zone2 speakers using an external amplifier” (p.58)

Living room (Main zone)

Study room (Zone2)

NOTE

▪ Digital and analog audio sources (including radio), Bluetooth, USB, and network sources can be output to

Zone2. To listen to the playback of an external device in Zone2, you need to connect the device to the

AUDIO jacks (AV 1-2, AUDIO 1-5 or

PHONO jacks) of the unit.

▪

“Main Zone Sync” allows you to play back the same audio output in Main zone as Zone2. When “Main

Zone Sync” is selected as the Zone2 input, the Zone2 input automatically switches in conjunction with the

input source selected in the main zone.

▪ The party mode allows you to play back the same audio output in Main zone as Zone2, whatever the input

audio signal type. Multichannel sources are mixed down to 2 channels and output to the Zone2. For

details on the party mode, see the following:

– “Enjoying the same source in multiple rooms (party mode)” (p.60)

Connecting Zone2 speakers

Connecting Zone2 speakers using the unit’s internal

amplifier

Connect the speakers placed in Zone2 to the unit with a speaker cable.

NOTICE

▪ Unplug the unit’s power cable from an AC wall outlet before connecting the speakers.

To enable the multi-zone function, configure the necessary speaker settings. For

details, see the following:

• “Available configurations for advanced speaker systems using the unit’s internal

amplifier” (p.

27)

• “Assigning speaker configuration” (p.41)

• “Setting your speaker system” (p.110)

NOTE

You can also connect Zone2 speakers using an external amplifier. For details, see the following:

▪ “Connecting Zone2 speakers using an external amplifier” (p.58)

When using surround back speakers in the main zone

Connect Zone2 speakers to the EXTRA SP1 terminals. To utilize the EXTRA SP

terminals for Zone2 speakers, set “Power Amp Assign” in the “Setup

” menu to “7.1

+1Zone”. For details, see the following:

• “Setting your speaker system” (p.110)

1 2

4 5

1 2

SURROUND CENTER FRONT

SURROUND BACK

ZONE2

BI-AMP

ZONE2

SPEAKERS

SUBWOOFER

FRONT

SUR. BACK

SURROUND

PRE OUT

F.PRESENCE

EXTRA SP1

EXTRA SP2

Main zone

Zone2

The unit (rear)

When using presence speakers in the main zone

Connect Zone2 speakers to the EXTRA SP2 terminals. To utilize the EXTRA SP

terminals for Zone2 speakers, set “Power Amp Assign” in the “Setup” menu to “5.1.2

+1Zone

”. For details, see the following:

• “Setting your speaker system” (p.110)

1 2

4 5

SURROUND CENTER FRONT

SURROUND BACK

ZONE2

BI-AMP

ZONE2

SPEAKERS

SUBWOOFER

FRONT

SUR. BACK

SURROUND

PRE OUT

F.PRESENCE

EXTRA SP1

EXTRA SP2

Main zone

Zone2

The unit (rear)

Connecting Zone2 speakers using an external amplifier

Connect the external amplifier placed in Zone2 to the unit with a stereo pin cable.

NOTICE

▪ Unplug the unit’s power cable from the AC wall outlet before connecting an external amplifier.

NOTE

You can connect the speakers placed in Zone2 to the unit with speaker cables. For details, see the following:

▪ “Connecting Zone2 speakers using the unit’s internal amplifier” (p.56)

ANTENNA

AUDIO 4

AUDIO 5

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

COMPONENT VIDEO

COAXIAL

AUDIO 1

AUDIO 2

AUDIO 3

AV 1 AV 2

ARC

VIDEO

ZONE OUT

SUBW

FRONT

CENTER

SUR. BACK

SURROUND

PRE OUT

ZONE 2

TRIGGER OUT

OUT

0.1A

HDMI

OUT

PHONO

GND

HDCP2.2

( )

(1 MOVIE) (5 STB)

( 7 TV )

( 3 MUSIC )

( 2 RADIO )

AUDIO

1 2

4 5

Q W

ZONE OUT

ZONE 2

The unit (rear)

Main zone

Zone2

External amplifier Audio

input (analog stereo)

ZONE2 OUT jacks

NOTE

You can adjust the volume for Zone2 output with the unit. When using an external amplifier with volume

control, set “Volume” in the “Setup” menu to “Fixed”. For details, see the following:

▪ “Setting the use of volume adjustments for Zone2 output” (p.138)

Operating the unit from Zone2 (remote connection)

You can operate the unit or external devices from Zone2 using the remote control

supplied with each device if you connect an infrared signal receiver/emitter to the

unit’s REMOTE IN/OUT jacks.

ANTENNA

AUDIO 4

AUDIO 5

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

COMPONENT VIDEO

COAXIAL

AUDIO 1

AUDIO 2

AUDIO 3

AV 1 AV 2

ARC

VIDEO

ZONE OUT

CENTER

PRE OUT

ZONE 2

TRIGGER OUT

REMOTE

12V

OUT

0.1A

HDMI

OUT

PHONO

GND

HDCP2.2

( )

(1 MOVIE) (5 STB)

( 7 TV )

( 3 MUSIC )

( 2 RADIO )

REMOTE

OUT

The unit (rear)

Main zone

Zone2

External device

(such as a CD player)

REMOTE IN/OUT jacks

Infrared signal

transmitter

Infrared signal

receiver

Remote control (supplied

with each device)

An infrared signal transmitter is not required if you are using Yamaha products that

support remote connections, as the unit does. You can transmit remote control signals

by connecting the REMOTE IN/OUT jacks with monaural mini-jack cables and an

infrared signal receiver.

REMOTE

OUT

REMOTE

OUT

Remote control

Zone2

REMOTE IN/OUT jacks

Infrared signal receiver

Yamaha products (up to

six, including the unit)

REMOTE IN/OUT jacks

Controlling Zone2

Basic procedure for playing back music in Zone2 is as follows.

Set MAIN/ZONE 2 to “ZONE 2”.

Press z (receiver power).

Each time you press the key, Zone2 output is enabled or disabled. When

Zone2 output is enabled, “ZONE2” lights up in the front display.

Use the input selection keys to select an input source.

NOTE

▪ Presses NET repeatedly to select a desired network source.

▪ You cannot select Bluetooth, USB and network sources exclusively for each zone. For example,

if you select “

SERVER

” for Zone2 when “USB” is selected for the main zone, the input source for

the main zone also switches to “SERVER”.

Start playback on the external device or select a radio station.

NOTE

▪ The on-screen operations are not available for Zone2. Use the front display to control Zone2.

▪ AirPlay is available in Zone2 only when AirPlay playback is ongoing in the main zone.

▪ Press SCENE to select the input source and settings with just one touch using the SCENE

function. For details on the SCENE function, see the following:

– “Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE)” (p.89)

▪ To set the sleep timer (120 min, 90 min, 60 min, 30 min, off), press SLEEP repeatedly. The

Zone2 output will be disabled after a specified period of time.

▪ To adjust the Zone2 volume, press VOLUME or MUTE (when using the unit’s internal amplifier).

▪ To enable the Compressed Music Enhancer function, press ENHANCER.

▪ The Zone2 input automatically switches in conjunction with the input source selected in the main

zone when “

Main Zone Sync” is selected as the Zone2 input.

▪ To play back DSD audio in Zone2, select “Main Zone Sync” as the Zone2 input or use the party

mode.

▪ Depending on the “Remote Key” setting, the PROGRAM Key may be also available in Zone2.

CAUTION

▪ To avoid unexpected noise, never play back DTS-CDs in Zone2.

Enjoying the same source in multiple rooms (party

mode)

Press PARTY, and then the party mode allows you to play back in Zone2 the same

music that is being played back in the main zone. During the party mode, stereo

playback is automatically selected for all zones. Utilize this function when you want to

use main zone music as background music for a house party.

Each time you press the key, the party mode is turned on or off.

NOTE

If the party mode does not work on Zone2, set “Party Mode Set” in the “Setup” menu to “Enable”. For details,

see the following:

▪ “Setting the use of switching to the party mode on Zone2” (p.141)

PLAYBACK

Basic playback procedure

Basic procedure for playing back video and music

Basic procedure for playing back video and music is as follows.

Turn on the external devices (such as a TV or BD/DVD player)

connected to the unit.

Use the input selection keys to select an input source.

PRES ET

BAND TUNINGTUNING

MEMORY

RED GREEN

YELLOW

BLUE

POP-UP

/MENU

HOME

TOP

VOLUME

BLUETOOTH

NET USBTUNER

INPUT

PROGR AM

SUR. DECODE

BASS

ENHANCER

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

SCENE

4321

8765

HDMI OUT

PARTY

SLEEP

MAIN

ZONE 2

PRES ET

BAND

TUNING

MEMORY

RED

GREEN

YELLOW

BLUE

POP-UP

/MENU

HOME

TOP

VOLUME

BLUETOOTH

NET

USB

TUNER

INPUT

PROGR AM

SUR. DECODE

BASS

ENHANCER

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

SCENE

HDMI OUT

PARTY

SLEEP

MAIN

ZONE 2

PRES ET

BANDBAND TUNINGTUNING TUNINGTUNING

MEMORYMEMORY

RED GREEN

YELLOW

BLUE

POP-UP

/MENU

HOME

TOP

VOLUME

BLUETOOTH

NET USBTUNER

INPUT

PROGR AM

SUR. DECODE

BASS

ENHANCER

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

SCENE

4321

8765

HDMI OUT

PARTY

SLEEP

MAIN

ZONE 2

PRESET

RED GREEN

YELLOW

BLUE

BLUETOOTH

NET USBTUNER

INPUT

4321

8765

PRE

RED

REE

ELL

LUETOOTH

NET

USB

TUNE

INPUT

PRESET

RED GREEN

YELLOW

BLUE

BLUETOOTH

NET USBTUNER

INPUT

4321

8765

RESET

GREE

YELLOW

BLUE

BAND TUNINGTUNING

MEMORY

VOLUME

PROGRAM

SUR. DECODE

BASS

ENHANCER

STRAIGHT

AND T

NIN

MEM

UR. DE

ODE

ENHAN

TRAI

BANDBAND TUNINGTUNING TUNINGTUNING

MEMORYMEMORY

VOLUME

PROGRAM

SUR. DECODE

BASS

ENHANCER

STRAIGHT

BAND

BBB

ANANAN

DDD

TUNING

TTT

UUU

NIN

NINNINNIN

GGG

TUNING

TTT

UUU

NIN

NINNINNIN

GGG

MEMORY

MEMEME

MMM

OOO

RRR

YYY

PROGRAM

SUR. DECODE

SUR. DECODESUR. DECODE

UR. DE

BASS

BABA

SSSS

ENHANCER

ENHA

STRAIGHT

VOLUME

Input selection keys

Start playback on the external device or select a radio station.

Press VOLUME to adjust the volume.

NOTE

▪ To mute the audio output, press MUTE. Press MUTE again to unmute.

▪ Refer to the instruction manual for the external device.

Selecting an HDMI output jack

Press HDMI OUT to select the HDMI OUT jacks for video/audio output.

Each time you press the key, the HDMI OUT jack to be used for signal output

changes.

ENHANCER

LINK

ECO

MASTER

OUT

YPAO

VOL.

DRC

SLEEP

PARTY

ZONE

3 B2 A

MUT E VIR TUAL

FPR

FPL

STEREO

TUNED

VOL .

HDMI OUT 1

SBL SBR

HDMI OUT 1+2

Outputs the same signal at both the HDMI OUT 1 and HDMI OUT 2 jacks.

HDMI OUT 1

Output the signals at the HDMI OUT 1 jack.

HDMI OUT 2

Output the signals at the HDMI OUT 2 jack.

HDMI OUT Off

Does not output the signals at the HDMI OUT jacks.

NOTE

▪ You can also select an HDMI output jack by selecting a scene. For details, see the following:

– “Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE)” (p.89)

▪ When “HDMI OUT 1+2” is selected, the unit outputs video signals at the highest resolution supported by

both TVs (or projectors) connected to the unit. (For example, if you have connected a 1080p TV to the

HDMI OUT 1

jack and a 720p TV to the

HDMI OUT 2 jack, the unit outputs 720p video signals.)

Switching information on the front display

Press INFO on the front panel to select between the various display items on the front

display, as shown in the following table.

ENHANCER

LINK

ECO

MASTER

OUT

YPAO

VOL.

DRC

SLEEP

STEREO

PARTY

TUNED

ZONE

3 B2 A

FPR

SBL SB SBR

FPL

MUT E VIR TUAL

VOL .

Audio Decoder

Item

About 3 seconds after a display item is selected, its corresponding information

appears.

ENHANCER

LINK

ECO

MASTER

OUT

YPAO

VOL.

DRC

SLEEP

STEREO

PARTY

TUNED

ZONE

3 B2 A

SBL SB SBR

MUT E VIR TUA L

FPL FP R

VOL .

†‡ Dsur

Information

Currently input source Displayed item

HDMI

AUX

AUDIO

PHONO

Input (input source name), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio

Decoder (decoder name*)

TUNER (FM/AM)

Frequency (frequency), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio

Decoder (decoder name*)

(U.K., Europe, Russia and Middle East models only)

Radio Data System data is also available when the unit is tuned into a

Radio Data System broadcasting station. For details, see the

following:

• “Displaying the Radio Data System information” (p.80)

TUNER (DAB)

(U.K., Europe, Russia, Middle East and Australia models only)

For details, see the following:

• “Displaying the DAB information” (p.74)

Bluetooth

USB

Song (song title), Artist (artist name), Album (album name), DSP

Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*)

SERVER

AirPlay

Song (song title), Artist (artist name), Album (album name), DSP

Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*), IP

Address, Ethernet MAC, Wi-Fi MAC

NET RADIO

Song (song title), Album (album name), Station (station name), DSP

Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*), IP

Address, Ethernet MAC, Wi-Fi MAC

MusicCast Link

DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*),

IP Address, Ethernet MAC, Wi-Fi MAC

* The name of the audio decoder currently activated is displayed. If no audio decoder

is activated, “Decoder Off” appears.

NOTE

Available items vary depending on the selected input source. The displayed item can also be applied

separately to each input group which is shown in the table and divided by ruled lines.

Item names and functions of the playback screen

The item names and functions of the playback screen, available when your TV is

connected to the unit via HDMI, are as follows.

Status indicators

Display the current shuffle/repeat settings, playback status (such as play/pause)

and elapsed time.

Playback information

Displays the artist name, song title and album name.

Use the following remote control keys to control playback.

PRESE T

BAND TUNINGTUNING

MEMORY

RED GREEN

YELLOW

BLUE

POP-UP

/MENU

HOME

TOP

VOLUME

BLUETOOTH

NET USBTUNER

INPUT

PROGR AM

SUR. DECODE

BASS

ENHANCER

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

SCENE

4321

8765

HDMI OUT

PARTY

SLEEP

MAIN

ZONE 2

PRESE T

BAND

TUNING

MEMORY

RED

GREEN

YELLOW

BLUE

POP-UP

/MENU

HOME

TOP

VOLUME

BLUETOOTH

NET

USB

TUNER

INPUT

PROGR AM

SUR. DECODE

BASS

ENHANCER

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

SCENE

HDMI OUT

PARTY

SLEEP

MAIN

ZONE 2

PRESE T

BANDBAND TUNINGTUNING TUNINGTUNING

MEMORYMEMORY

RED GREEN

YELLOW

BLUE

POP-UP

/MENU

HOME

TOP

VOLUME

BLUETOOTH

NET USBTUNER

INPUT

PROGR AM

SUR. DECODE

BASS

ENHANCER

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

SCENE

4321

8765

HDMI OUT

PARTY

SLEEP

MAIN

ZONE 2

BAND TUNINGTUNING

MEMORY

VOLUME

PROGRAM

SUR. DECODE

BASS

ENHANCER

STRAIGHT

AND T

NIN

MEM

UR. DE

ODE

ENHAN

TRAI

BANDBAND TUNINGTUNING TUNINGTUNING

MEMORYMEMORY

VOLUME

PROGRAM

SUR. DECODE

BASS

ENHANCER

STRAIGHT

TUNING

TUNINGTUNING

TTT

UUU

NIN

NINNINNIN

GGG

TUNING

TUNINGTUNING

TTT

UUU

NIN

NINNINNIN

GGG

OLUME

PROGRAM

SUR. DECODE

UR. DE

BASS

SSSS

ENHANCER

ENHA

STRAIGHT

External device operation

keys

External device

operation keys

Function

Resumes playback from pause.

Stops playback.

Stops playback temporarily.

Skips forward/backward.

NOTE

▪ Displayed items vary depending on the content of playback.

▪ Press RETURN to display the browse screen.

▪ When “Video Out” in the “Option” menu is set to except “Off”, you can close the playback screen by

pressing the left cursor key. To display the playback screen again, press any cursor key. For details on

“Video Out”, see the following:

– “Selecting a video source to be output with the selected audio source” (p.100)

Item names and functions of the browse screen

The item names and functions of the browse screen, available when your TV is

connected to the unit via HDMI, are as follows. The browse screen appears when the

next input source is selected.

• USB

• SERVER

• NET RADIO

Status indicators

Display the current shuffle/repeat settings.

Contents list

Displays the list of contents. Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER

to confirm the selection.

Item number/total

Operation menu

Use the cursor keys to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

Icon Function

Moves 10 pages backward.

Moves to the previous page of the list.

Moves to the playback screen.

Moves to the next page of the list.

Moves 10 pages forward.

NOTE

▪ Displayed items vary depending on the content of playback.

▪ When “Video Out” in the “Option” menu is set to except “Off”, you can close the browse screen by

pressing the left cursor key. To display the browse screen again, press any cursor key. For details on

“Video Out”, see the following:

– “Selecting a video source to be output with the selected audio source” (p.100)

Listening to FM/AM radio (Except for U.K., Europe, Russia, Middle East and Australia models)

Setting the frequency steps

(Asia and General models only)

At the factory, the frequency step setting is set to 50 kHz for FM and 9 kHz for AM.

Depending on your country or region, set the frequency steps to 100 kHz for FM and

10 kHz for AM.

Set the unit to standby mode.

When holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press MAIN

ZONE z.

(MAIN ZONE)

STRAIGHT

PROGRAM

Press PROGRAM to select “TU”.

ENHANCER

LINK

ECO

MASTER

OUT

YPAO

VOL.

DRC

SLEEP

STEREO

PARTY

TUNED

ZONE

3 B2 A

VOL .

FPR

SBL SB SBR

FPL

MUT E VIR TUAL

TU••••FM50/AM9

Press STRAIGHT to select “FM100/AM10”.

Press MAIN ZONE z to set the unit to standby mode and turn it

on again.

This completes the settings.

Selecting a frequency for reception

You can tune into a radio station by specifying its frequency.

NOTE

The radio frequencies differ depending on the country or region where the unit is being used. The explanation

of this section uses a display with frequencies used in U.K. and Europe models.

Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.

“TUNER” is selected as the input source and the frequency currently

selected is displayed on the front display.

ENHANCER

LINK

ECO

MASTER

OUT

YPAO

VOL.

DRC

SLEEP

STEREO

PARTY

TUNED

ZONE

3 B2 A

MUT E VIR TUAL

VOL .

FM 87.50MHz

Press BAND to select a band (FM or AM).

Press TUNING to set a frequency.

Hold down the key for about a second to search stations automatically.

PRES ET

BAND TUNINGTUNING

MEMORY

RED GREEN

YELLOW

BLUE

POP-UP

/MENU

HOME

TOP

VOLUME

BLUETOOTH

NET USBTUNER

INPUT

PROGR AM

SUR. DECODE

BASS

ENHANCER

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

SCENE

4321

8765

HDMI OUT

PARTY

SLEEP

MAIN

ZONE 2

PRES ET

BAND

TUNING

MEMORY

RED

GREEN

YELLOW

BLUE

POP-UP

/MENU

HOME

TOP

VOLUME

BLUETOOTH

NET

USB

TUNER

INPUT

PROGR AM

SUR. DECODE

BASS

ENHANCER

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

SCENE

HDMI OUT

PARTY

SLEEP

MAIN

ZONE 2

PRES ET

BANDBAND TUNINGTUNING TUNINGTUNING

MEMORYMEMORY

RED GREEN

YELLOW

BLUE

POP-UP

/MENU

HOME

TOP

VOLUME

BLUETOOTH

NET USBTUNER

INPUT

PROGR AM

SUR. DECODE

BASS

ENHANCER

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

SCENE

4321

8765

HDMI OUT

PARTY

SLEEP

MAIN

ZONE 2

BAND TUNINGTUNING

MEMORY

VOLUME

PROGRAM

SUR. DECODE

BASS

ENHANCER

STRAIGHT

AND T

NIN

MEM

UR. DE

ODE

ENHAN

TRAI

BANDBAND TUNINGTUNING TUNINGTUNING

MEMORYMEMORY

VOLUME

PROGRAM

SUR. DECODE

BASS

ENHANCER

STRAIGHT

MEMORY

MEMEME

MMM

OOO

RRR

YYY

OLUME

PROGRAM

SUR. DECODE

UR. DE

BASS

ENHANCER

ENHA

STRAIGHT

BAND

UNING

ENHANCER

LINK

ECO

MASTER

OUT

YPAO

VOL.

DRC

SLEEP

PARTY

ZONE

3 B2 A

FPR

SBL SB SBR

FPL

MUT E VIR TUAL

VOL .

STEREO

TUNED

FM 98.50MHz

On the front display, “TUNED” lights up when the unit is receiving an

FM/AM radio station signal.

“STEREO” lights up when the unit is receiving a stereo FM radio signal.

NOTE

You can watch videos input from external devices while listening to radio. For details, see the

following:

▪ “Selecting a video source to be output with the selected audio source” (p.100)

Selecting a preset station

Tune into a registered radio station by selecting its preset number.

Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.

“TUNER” is selected as the input source and the frequency currently

selected is displayed on the front display.

Press PRESET to select the desired radio station.

PRES ET

BAND TUNINGTUNING

MEMORY

RED GREEN

YELLOW

BLUE

POP-UP

/MENU

HOME

TOP

VOLUME

BLUETOOTH

NET USBTUNER

INPUT

PROGR AM

SUR. DECODE

BASS

ENHANCER

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

SCENE

4321

8765

HDMI OUT

PARTY

SLEEP

MAIN

ZONE 2

PRES ET

BAND

TUNING

MEMORY

RED

GREEN

YELLOW

BLUE

POP-UP

/MENU

HOME

TOP

VOLUME

BLUETOOTH

NET

USB

TUNER

INPUT

PROGR AM

SUR. DECODE

BASS

ENHANCER

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

SCENE

HDMI OUT

PARTY

SLEEP

MAIN

ZONE 2

PRES ET

BANDBAND TUNINGTUNING TUNINGTUNING

MEMORYMEMORY

RED GREEN

YELLOW

BLUE

POP-UP

/MENU

HOME

TOP

VOLUME

BLUETOOTH

NET USBTUNER

INPUT

PROGR AM

SUR. DECODE

BASS

ENHANCER

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

SCENE

4321

8765

HDMI OUT

PARTY

SLEEP

MAIN

ZONE 2

PRESET

RED GREEN

YELLOW

BLUE

BLUETOOTH

NET USBTUNER

INPUT

4321

8765

PRE

RED

REE

ELL

LUETOOTH

NET

USB

TUNE

INPUT

PRESET

RED GREEN

YELLOW

BLUE

BLUETOOTH

NET USBTUNER

INPUT

4321

8765

GREE

YELLOW

BLUEBLUE

BLUE

BLUETOOT

NET

TUNER

INPU

PRESET

ENHANCER

YPAO

VOL.

DRC

SLEEP

PARTY

ZONE

3 B2 A

MUT E VIR TUAL

FPR

SBL SB SBR

FPL

LINK

ECO

MASTER

OUT

VOL .

STEREO

TUNED

01:FM 98.50MHz

NOTE

“No Presets” appears on the front display when no radio stations are registered.

Registering FM radio stations automatically (FM Auto

Preset)

Automatically register FM radio stations with strong signals.

NOTE

▪ You can register up to 40 radio stations as presets.

▪ To register AM radio stations, see the following:

– “Registering a radio station manually” (p.68)

Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.

“TUNER” is selected as the input source and the frequency currently

selected is displayed on the front display.

Press OPTION.

Use the cursor keys to select “Preset” and press ENTER.

ENHANCER

LINK

ECO

MASTER

OUT

YPAO

VOL.

DRC

SLEEP

STEREO

PARTY

TUNED

ZONE

3 B2 A

FPR

SBL SB SBR

FPL

MUT E VIR TUAL

VOL .

Preset

The preset number from which to start the registration is displayed on the

front display.

NOTE

To specify the preset number from which to start the registration, press cursor keys or PRESET to

select a preset number.

To start the Auto Preset process, press ENTER.

ENHANCER

LINK

ECO

MASTER

OUT

YPAO

VOL.

DRC

SLEEP

PARTY

ZONE

3 B2 A

MUT E VIR TUAL

STEREO

TUNED

FPR

SBL SB SBR

FPL

VOL .

01:FM 87.50MHz

“SEARCH” appears during Auto Preset

Preset number from which to start the registration

The Auto Preset process starts and “SEARCH” appears during Auto

Preset.

NOTE

To cancel the Auto Preset process, press RETURN.

When the Auto Preset process finishes, “FINISH” appears on the front display and the

“Option” menu closes automatically.

ENHANCER

LINK

ECO

MASTER

OUT

YPAO

VOL.

DRC

SLEEP

STEREO

PARTY

TUNED

ZONE

3 B2 A

FPR

SBL SB SBR

FPL

MUT E VIR TUAL

VOL .

Auto Preset

Registering a radio station manually

Select a radio station manually and register it to a preset number.

NOTE

You can register up to 40 radio stations as presets.

Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.

“TUNER” is selected as the input source and the frequency currently

selected is displayed on the front display.

Press BAND to select a band (FM or AM).

Press TUNING to set a frequency.

Hold down the key for about a second to search stations automatically.

Hold down MEMORY for a few seconds.

The first time that you do register a station, the selected radio station will

be registered to the preset number “01”. Thereafter, each radio station

you select will be registered to the next empty (unused) preset number

after the most recently registered number.

PRES ET

BAND TUNINGTUNING

MEMORY

RED GREEN

YELLOW

BLUE

POP-UP

/MENU

HOME

TOP

VOLUME

BLUETOOTH

NET USBTUNER

INPUT

PROGR AM

SUR. DECODE

BASS

ENHANCER

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

SCENE

4321

8765

HDMI OUT

PARTY

SLEEP

MAIN

ZONE 2

PRES ET

BAND

TUNING

MEMORY

RED

GREEN

YELLOW

BLUE

POP-UP

/MENU

HOME

TOP

VOLUME

BLUETOOTH

NET

USB

TUNER

INPUT

PROGR AM

SUR. DECODE

BASS

ENHANCER

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

SCENE

HDMI OUT

PARTY

SLEEP

MAIN

ZONE 2

PRES ET

BANDBAND TUNINGTUNING TUNINGTUNING

MEMORYMEMORY

RED GREEN

YELLOW

BLUE

POP-UP

/MENU

HOME

TOP

VOLUME

BLUETOOTH

NET USBTUNER

INPUT

PROGR AM

SUR. DECODE

BASS

ENHANCER

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

SCENE

4321

8765

HDMI OUT

PARTY

SLEEP

MAIN

ZONE 2

BAND TUNINGTUNING

MEMORY

VOLUME

PROGRAM

SUR. DECODE

BASS

ENHANCER

STRAIGHT

AND T

NIN

MEM

UR. DE

ODE

ENHAN

TRAI

BANDBAND TUNINGTUNING TUNINGTUNING

MEMORYMEMORY

VOLUME

PROGRAM

SUR. DECODE

BASS

ENHANCER

STRAIGHT

BANDBAND

BAND

BBB

ANANAN

DDD

TUNING

TTT

UUU

NIN

NINNINNIN

GGG

TUNING

TTT

UUU

NIN

NINNINNIN

GGG

OLUME

PROGRAM

SUR. DECODE

UR. DE

BASS

SSSS

ENHANCER

ENHA

STRAIGHT

MEMORY

ENHANCER

LINK

ECO

MASTER

OUT

YPAO

VOL.

DRC

SLEEP

PARTY

ZONE

3 B2 A

MUT E VIR TUAL

FPR

SBL SB SBR

FPL

VOL .

01:FM 98.50MHz

STEREO

TUNED

Preset number

NOTE

To select a preset number for registering, press MEMORY once after tuning into the desired radio

station, press PRESET

to select a preset number, and then press MEMORY again.

ENHANCER

LINK

ECO

MASTER

OUT

YPAO

VOL.

DRC

PARTY

ZONE

3 B2 A

FPR

SBL SB SBR

FPL

MUT E VIR TUAL

SLEEP

VOL .

02:Empty

TUNED

STEREO

“Empty” (not in use) or the frequency currently registered

This completes the registers.

Clearing preset stations

Clear radio stations registered to the preset numbers.

Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.

“TUNER” is selected as the input source and the frequency currently

selected is displayed on the front display.

Press OPTION.

Use the cursor keys to select “Preset” and press ENTER.

ENHANCER

LINK

ECO

MASTER

OUT

YPAO

VOL.

DRC

SLEEP

STEREO

PARTY

TUNED

ZONE

3 B2 A

FPR

SBL SB SBR

FPL

MUT E VIR TUAL

VOL .

Preset

Use the cursor keys to select “CLEAR”.

Use the cursor keys to select a preset station to be cleared and

press ENTER.

ENHANCER

LINK

ECO

MASTER

OUT

YPAO

VOL.

DRC

SLEEP

PARTY

ZONE

3 B2 A

MUT E VIR TUA L

FPR

SBL SB SBR

FPL

VOL .

STEREO

TUNED

01:FM 98.50MHz

Preset station to be cleared

If the preset station is cleared, “Cleared” appears and then the next in-use

preset number is displayed.

01:Cleared

Repeat step 5 until all desired preset stations are cleared.

Press OPTION.

This completes the clearing preset stations.

Clearing all preset stations

Clear all the radio stations registered to the preset numbers.

Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.

“TUNER” is selected as the input source and the frequency currently

selected is displayed on the front display.

Press OPTION.

Use the cursor keys to select “Preset” and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys to select “CLEAR ALL”.

Use the cursor keys to select “Execute” and press ENTER.

If all the preset stations are cleared, “CLEAR ALL” appears and the

“Option” menu closes automatically.

Listening to DAB radio (U.K., Europe, Russia, Middle East and Australia models)

Preparing the DAB tuning

DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) uses digital signals for clearer sound and more

stable reception compared to analog signals. The unit can also receive DAB+ (an

upgraded version of DAB) that allows for more stations using MPEG-4 HE-AAC v2

audio codec, which has a more efficient transmission method.

NOTE

▪ The unit supports Band III (174 to 240 MHz) only.

▪ Be sure to check the DAB coverage in your area in that not all areas are currently being covered. For a list

of nationwide DAB statuses and worldwide DAB frequencies, check WorldDMB online at

http://www.worlddab.org/

▪

For details on the antenna connection, see the following:

– “Connecting the DAB/FM antenna (U.K., Europe, Russia, Middle East and Australia models)” (p.35)

Before tuning into DAB radio stations, perform an initial scan.

Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.

Press BAND to select the DAB band.

The following message appears on the front display if you have not

performed an initial scan yet.

ENHANCER

LINK

ECO

MASTER

OUT

YPAO

VOL.

DRC

SLEEP

PARTY

ZONE

3 B2 A

MUT E VIR TUAL

SBL SB SBR

FPRFPL

STEREO

TUNED

VOL .

Press [ENTER]

Press ENTER to start an initial scan.

ENHANCER

LINK

ECO

MASTER

OUT

YPAO

VOL.

DRC

SLEEP

PARTY

ZONE

3 B2 A

MUT E VIR TUAL

SBL SB SBR

FPRFPL

STEREO

TUNED

VOL .

>>>------- 30%

When the initial scan finishes, the unit automatically tunes into the first

DAB radio station as stored in station order.

ENHANCER

LINK

ECO

MASTER

OUT

YPAO

VOL.

DRC

SLEEP

PARTY

ZONE

3 B2 A

MUT E VIR TUAL

SBL SB SBR

FPRFPL

STEREO

TUNED

VOL .

BBC Radio 4

NOTE

▪ If no DAB radio stations are found by an initial scan, the message in Step 2 appears again.

Press

ENTER to start an initial scan again.

▪

You can check reception strength of each DAB channel label. For details, see the following:

– “Checking reception strength of each DAB channel label” (p.75)

▪ To perform an initial scan again after some DAB radio stations are stored, select “Init Scan” in

the “Option” menu. If you perform an initial scan again, the DAB radio stations currently

registered to the preset numbers will be cleared. For details, see the following:

– “Performing an initial scan for DAB radio reception” (p.103)

Selecting a DAB radio station for reception

You can select a DAB radio station from the stations stored by the initial scan.

Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.

Press BAND to select the DAB band.

“TUNER” is selected as the input source and then the DAB radio station

currently selected is displayed on the front display.

Press TUNING to select a DAB radio station.

PRES ET

BAND TUNINGTUNING

MEMORY

RED GREEN

YELLOW

BLUE

POP-UP

/MENU

HOME

TOP

VOLUME

BLUETOOTH

NET USBTUNER

INPUT

PROGR AM

SUR. DECODE

BASS

ENHANCER

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

SCENE

4321

8765

HDMI OUT

PARTY

SLEEP

MAIN

ZONE 2

PRES ET

BAND

TUNING

MEMORY

RED

GREEN

YELLOW

BLUE

POP-UP

/MENU

HOME

TOP

VOLUME

BLUETOOTH

NET

USB

TUNER

INPUT

PROGR AM

SUR. DECODE

BASS

ENHANCER

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

SCENE

HDMI OUT

PARTY

SLEEP

MAIN

ZONE 2

PRES ET

BANDBAND TUNINGTUNING TUNINGTUNING

MEMORYMEMORY

RED GREEN

YELLOW

BLUE

POP-UP

/MENU

HOME

TOP

VOLUME

BLUETOOTH

NET USBTUNER

INPUT

PROGR AM

SUR. DECODE

BASS

ENHANCER

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

SCENE

4321

8765

HDMI OUT

PARTY

SLEEP

MAIN

ZONE 2

BAND TUNINGTUNING

MEMORY

VOLUME

PROGRAM

SUR. DECODE

BASS

ENHANCER

STRAIGHT

AND T

NIN

MEM

UR. DE

ODE

ENHAN

TRAI

BANDBAND TUNINGTUNING TUNINGTUNING

MEMORYMEMORY

VOLUME

PROGRAM

SUR. DECODE

BASS

ENHANCER

STRAIGHT

MEMORY

MEMEME

MMM

OOO

RRR

YYY

OLUME

PROGRAM

SUR. DECODE

UR. DE

BASS

ENHANCER

ENHA

STRAIGHT

BAND

UNING

ENHANCER

LINK

ECO

MASTER

OUT

YPAO

VOL.

DRC

SLEEP

PARTY

ZONE

3 B2 A

MUT E VIR TUAL

SBL SB SBR

FPRFPL

STEREO

TUNED

VOL .

Daily Service

NOTE

▪ “Off Air” appears when the selected DAB radio station is currently not available.

▪ When the unit is receiving a secondary station, “2” appears next to “DAB”.

ENHANCER

LINK

ECO

MASTER

OUT

YPAO

VOL.

DRC

SLEEP

PARTY

ZONE

3 B2 A

MUT E VIR TUAL

SBL SB SBR

FPRFPL

STEREO

TUNED

VOL .

BBC National

Secondary station

▪ You can watch videos input from external devices while listening to radio. For details, see the

following:

– “Selecting a video source to be output with the selected audio source” (p.100)

Selecting a preset DAB radio station

Tune into a registered DAB radio station by selecting its preset number.

Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.

Press BAND to select the DAB band.

“TUNER” is selected as the input source and then the DAB radio station

currently selected is displayed on the front display.

Press PRESET to select the desired DAB radio station.

PRES ET

BAND TUNINGTUNING

MEMORY

RED GREEN

YELLOW

BLUE

POP-UP

/MENU

HOME

TOP

VOLUME

BLUETOOTH

NET USBTUNER

INPUT

PROGR AM

SUR. DECODE

BASS

ENHANCER

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

SCENE

4321

8765

HDMI OUT

PARTY

SLEEP

MAIN

ZONE 2

PRES ET

BAND

TUNING

MEMORY

RED

GREEN

YELLOW

BLUE

POP-UP

/MENU

HOME

TOP

VOLUME

BLUETOOTH

NET

USB

TUNER

INPUT

PROGR AM

SUR. DECODE

BASS

ENHANCER

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

SCENE

HDMI OUT

PARTY

SLEEP

MAIN

ZONE 2

PRES ET

BANDBAND TUNINGTUNING TUNINGTUNING

MEMORYMEMORY

RED GREEN

YELLOW

BLUE

POP-UP

/MENU

HOME

TOP

VOLUME

BLUETOOTH

NET USBTUNER

INPUT

PROGR AM

SUR. DECODE

BASS

ENHANCER

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

SCENE

4321

8765

HDMI OUT

PARTY

SLEEP

MAIN

ZONE 2

PRESET

RED GREEN

YELLOW

BLUE

BLUETOOTH

NET USBTUNER

INPUT

4321

8765

PRE

RED

REE

ELL

LUETOOTH

NET

USB

TUNE

INPUT

PRESET

RED GREEN

YELLOW

BLUE

BLUETOOTH

NET USBTUNER

INPUT

4321

8765

GREE

YELLOW

BLUEBLUE

BLUE

BLUETOOT

NET

TUNER

INPU

PRESET

ENHANCER

LINK

ECO

MASTER

OUT

YPAO

VOL.

DRC

SLEEP

PARTY

ZONE

3 B2 A

MUT E VIR TUAL

SBL SB SBR

FPRFPL

STEREO

TUNED

VOL .

PRESET:01

NOTE

“No Presets” appears when no DAB radio stations are registered.

Registering a DAB radio station as presets

Select a DAB radio station and register it to a preset number.

NOTE

You can register up to 40 radio stations as presets.

Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.

Press BAND to select the DAB band.

“TUNER” is selected as the input source and then the DAB radio station

currently selected is displayed on the front display.

Press TUNING to select a DAB radio station.

Hold down MEMORY for a few seconds.

The first time that you do register a station, the selected radio station will

be registered to the preset number “01”. Thereafter, each radio station

you select will be registered to the next empty (unused) preset number

after the most recently registered number.

PRES ET

BAND TUNINGTUNING

MEMORY

RED GREEN

YELLOW

BLUE

POP-UP

/MENU

HOME

TOP

VOLUME

BLUETOOTH

NET USBTUNER

INPUT

PROGR AM

SUR. DECODE

BASS

ENHANCER

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

SCENE

4321

8765

HDMI OUT

PARTY

SLEEP

MAIN

ZONE 2

PRES ET

BAND

TUNING

MEMORY

RED

GREEN

YELLOW

BLUE

POP-UP

/MENU

HOME

TOP

VOLUME

BLUETOOTH

NET

USB

TUNER

INPUT

PROGR AM

SUR. DECODE

BASS

ENHANCER

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

SCENE

HDMI OUT

PARTY

SLEEP

MAIN

ZONE 2

PRES ET

BANDBAND TUNINGTUNING TUNINGTUNING

MEMORYMEMORY

RED GREEN

YELLOW

BLUE

POP-UP

/MENU

HOME

TOP

VOLUME

BLUETOOTH

NET USBTUNER

INPUT

PROGR AM

SUR. DECODE

BASS

ENHANCER

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

SCENE

4321

8765

HDMI OUT

PARTY

SLEEP

MAIN

ZONE 2

BAND TUNINGTUNING

MEMORY

VOLUME

PROGRAM

SUR. DECODE

BASS

ENHANCER

STRAIGHT

AND T

NIN

MEM

UR. DE

ODE

ENHAN

TRAI

BANDBAND TUNINGTUNING TUNINGTUNING

MEMORYMEMORY

VOLUME

PROGRAM

SUR. DECODE

BASS

ENHANCER

STRAIGHT

BANDBAND

BAND

BBB

ANANAN

DDD

TUNING

TTT

UUU

NIN

NINNINNIN

GGG

TUNING

TTT

UUU

NIN

NINNINNIN

GGG

OLUME

PROGRAM

SUR. DECODE

UR. DE

BASS

SSSS

ENHANCER

ENHA

STRAIGHT

MEMORY

ENHANCER

LINK

ECO

MASTER

OUT

YPAO

VOL.

DRC

SLEEP

PARTY

ZONE

3 B2 A

MUT E VIR TUAL

SBL SB SBR

FPRFPL

STEREO

TUNED

VOL .

01:BBC Radio 4

Preset number

NOTE

To select a preset number for registering, press MEMORY once after tuning into the desired radio

station, press PRESET to select a preset number, and then press MEMORY again.

ENHANCER

LINK

ECO

MASTER

OUT

YPAO

VOL.

DRC

SLEEP

PARTY

ZONE

3 B2 A

MUT E VIR TUA L

SBL SB SBR

FPRFPL

STEREO

TUNED

VOL .

02:Empty

“Empty” (not in use) or “Overwrite?” (in use)

This completes the registers.

Clearing preset DAB radio stations

Clear DAB radio stations registered to the preset numbers.

Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.

Press BAND to select the DAB band.

“TUNER” is selected as the input source and then the DAB radio station

currently selected is displayed on the front display.

Press OPTION.

Use the cursor keys to select “Preset” and press ENTER.

ENHANCER

LINK

ECO

MASTER

OUT

YPAO

VOL.

DRC

SLEEP

STEREO

PARTY

TUNED

ZONE

3 B2 A

FPR

SBL SB SBR

FPL

MUT E VIR TUAL

VOL .

Preset

Use the cursor keys to select “CLEAR”.

Use the cursor keys to select a preset station to be cleared and

press ENTER.

01:Clear?

Preset station to be cleared

If the preset station is cleared, “Cleared” appears and then the next in-use

preset number is displayed.

01:Cleared

Repeat step 6 until all desired preset stations are cleared.

Press OPTION.

This completes the clearing preset stations.

Clearing all preset DAB radio stations

Clear all the DAB radio stations registered to the preset numbers.

Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.

Press BAND to select the DAB band.

“TUNER” is selected as the input source and then the DAB radio station

currently selected is displayed on the front display.

Press OPTION.

Use the cursor keys to select “Preset” and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys to select “CLEAR ALL”.

Use the cursor keys to select “Execute” and press ENTER.

If all the preset stations are cleared, “CLEAR ALL” appears and the

“Option” menu closes automatically.

Displaying the DAB information

The unit can receive various types of DAB information when it is tuned into a DAB

radio station.

Tune into the desired DAB radio station.

Press INFO on the front panel to select between the various

display items.

ENHANCER

LINK

ECO

MASTER

OUT

YPAO

VOL.

DRC

SLEEP

PARTY

ZONE

3 B2 A

MUT E VIR TUAL

FPR

SBL SB SBR

FPL

STEREO

TUNED

VOL .

Program Type

Item name

About 3 seconds after a display item is selected, its corresponding

information appears on the front display.

ENHANCER

LINK

ECO

MASTER

OUT

YPAO

VOL.

DRC

SLEEP

PARTY

ZONE

3 B2 A

MUT E VIR TUAL

SBL SB SBR

FPRFPL

STEREO

TUNED

VOL .

Classic Music

Information

Service Label

Station name

DLS (Dynamic Label

Segment)

Information on the current station

Ensemble Label

Ensemble name

Program Type

Station genre

Date And Time

Current date and time

Audio Mode

Audio mode (monaural/stereo) and bit rate

CH Label/Freq.

Channel label and frequency

Signal Quality

Signal reception quality (0 [none] to 100 [best])

DSP Program

Sound mode name

Audio Decoder

Decoder name

NOTE

Some information may not be available depending on the selected DAB radio station.

Checking reception strength of

each DAB channel label

Checking reception strength of

each DAB channel label

You can check reception strength of each DAB channel

label (0 [none] to 100 [best]).

Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the

input source.

Press BAND to select the DAB band.

“TUNER” is selected as the input source and

then the DAB radio station currently selected

is displayed on the front display.

Press OPTION.

Use the cursor keys to select “Tune

AID” and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys to select the

desired DAB channel label.

ENHANCER

LINK

ECO

MASTER

OUT

YPAO

VOL.

DRC

SLEEP

PARTY

ZONE

3 B2 A

MUT E VIR TUA L

FPR

SBL SB SBR

FPL

STEREO

TUNED

VOL .

5A Level: 80

DAB channel label Reception strength

Press RETURN.

This completes the checking.

DAB frequency information

The unit supports Band III (174 to 240 MHz) only.

Frequency Channel label

174.928 MHz 5A

176.640 MHz 5B

178.352 MHz 5C

180.064 MHz 5D

181.936 MHz 6A

183.648 MHz 6B

185.360 MHz 6C

187.072 MHz 6D

188.928 MHz 7A

190.640 MHz 7B

192.352 MHz 7C

194.064 MHz 7D

195.936 MHz 8A

197.648 MHz 8B

199.360 MHz 8C

201.072 MHz 8D

202.928 MHz 9A

204.640 MHz 9B

206.352 MHz 9C

208.064 MHz 9D

209.936 MHz 10A

211.648 MHz 10B

213.360 MHz 10C

215.072 MHz 10D

216.928 MHz 11A

218.640 MHz 11B

220.352 MHz 11C

222.064 MHz 11D

223.936 MHz 12A

225.648 MHz 12B

227.360 MHz 12C

229.072 MHz 12D

230.784 MHz 13A

Frequency Channel label

232.496 MHz 13B

234.208 MHz 13C

235.776 MHz 13D

237.488 MHz 13E

239.200 MHz 13F

Listening to FM radio (U.K., Europe, Russia, Middle East and Australia models)

Selecting a frequency for FM radio reception

You can tune into an FM radio station by specifying its frequency.

NOTE

The radio frequencies differ depending on the country or region where the unit is being used. The explanation

of this section uses a display with frequencies used in U.K. and Europe models.

Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.

Press BAND to select the FM band.

“TUNER” is selected as the input source and the frequency currently

selected is displayed on the front display.

ENHANCER

LINK

ECO

MASTER

OUT

YPAO

VOL.

DRC

SLEEP

STEREO

PARTY

TUNED

ZONE

3 B2 A

MUT E VIR TUAL

VOL .

FM 87.50MHz

Press TUNING to set a frequency.

Hold down the key for about a second to search stations automatically.

PRES ET

BAND TUNINGTUNING

MEMORY

RED GREEN

YELLOW

BLUE

POP-UP

/MENU

HOME

TOP

VOLUME

BLUETOOTH

NET USBTUNER

INPUT

PROGR AM

SUR. DECODE

BASS

ENHANCER

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

SCENE

4321

8765

HDMI OUT

PARTY

SLEEP

MAIN

ZONE 2

PRES ET

BAND

TUNING

MEMORY

RED

GREEN

YELLOW

BLUE

POP-UP

/MENU

HOME

TOP

VOLUME

BLUETOOTH

NET

USB

TUNER

INPUT

PROGR AM

SUR. DECODE

BASS

ENHANCER

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

SCENE

HDMI OUT

PARTY

SLEEP

MAIN

ZONE 2

PRES ET

BANDBAND TUNINGTUNING TUNINGTUNING

MEMORYMEMORY

RED GREEN

YELLOW

BLUE

POP-UP

/MENU

HOME

TOP

VOLUME

BLUETOOTH

NET USBTUNER

INPUT

PROGR AM

SUR. DECODE

BASS

ENHANCER

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

SCENE

4321

8765

HDMI OUT

PARTY

SLEEP

MAIN

ZONE 2

BAND TUNINGTUNING

MEMORY

VOLUME

PROGRAM

SUR. DECODE

BASS

ENHANCER

STRAIGHT

AND T

NIN

MEM

UR. DE

ODE

ENHAN

TRAI

BANDBAND TUNINGTUNING TUNINGTUNING

MEMORYMEMORY

VOLUME

PROGRAM

SUR. DECODE

BASS

ENHANCER

STRAIGHT

MEMORY

MEMEME

MMM

OOO

RRR

YYY

OLUME

PROGRAM

SUR. DECODE

UR. DE

BASS

ENHANCER

ENHA

STRAIGHT

BAND

UNING

ENHANCER

LINK

ECO

MASTER

OUT

YPAO

VOL.

DRC

SLEEP

PARTY

ZONE

3 B2 A

FPR

SBL SB SBR

FPL

MUT E VIR TUAL

VOL .

STEREO

TUNED

FM 98.50MHz

On the front display, “TUNED” lights up when the unit is receiving an FM

radio station signal.

“STEREO” lights up when the unit is receiving a stereo FM radio signal.

NOTE

You can watch videos input from external devices while listening to radio. For details, see the

following:

▪ “Selecting a video source to be output with the selected audio source” (p.100)

Selecting a preset FM radio station

Tune into a registered FM radio station by selecting its preset number.

Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.

Press BAND to select the FM band.

“TUNER” is selected as the input source and the frequency currently

selected is displayed on the front display.

Press PRESET to select the desired FM radio station.

PRES ET

BAND TUNINGTUNING

MEMORY

RED GREEN

YELLOW

BLUE

POP-UP

/MENU

HOME

TOP

VOLUME

BLUETOOTH

NET USBTUNER

INPUT

PROGR AM

SUR. DECODE

BASS

ENHANCER

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

SCENE

4321

8765

HDMI OUT

PARTY

SLEEP

MAIN

ZONE 2

PRES ET

BAND

TUNING

MEMORY

RED

GREEN

YELLOW

BLUE

POP-UP

/MENU

HOME

TOP

VOLUME

BLUETOOTH

NET

USB

TUNER

INPUT

PROGR AM

SUR. DECODE

BASS

ENHANCER

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

SCENE

HDMI OUT

PARTY

SLEEP

MAIN

ZONE 2

PRES ET

BANDBAND TUNINGTUNING TUNINGTUNING

MEMORYMEMORY

RED GREEN

YELLOW

BLUE

POP-UP

/MENU

HOME

TOP

VOLUME

BLUETOOTH

NET USBTUNER

INPUT

PROGR AM

SUR. DECODE

BASS

ENHANCER

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

SCENE

4321

8765

HDMI OUT

PARTY

SLEEP

MAIN

ZONE 2

PRESET

RED GREEN

YELLOW

BLUE

BLUETOOTH

NET USBTUNER

INPUT

4321

8765

PRE

RED

REE

ELL

LUETOOTH

NET

USB

TUNE

INPUT

PRESET

RED GREEN

YELLOW

BLUE

BLUETOOTH

NET USBTUNER

INPUT

4321

8765

GREE

YELLOW

BLUEBLUE

BLUE

BLUETOOT

NET

TUNER

INPU

PRESET

ENHANCER

YPAO

VOL.

DRC

SLEEP

PARTY

ZONE

3 B2 A

MUT E VIR TUAL

FPR

SBL SB SBR

FPL

LINK

ECO

MASTER

OUT

VOL .

STEREO

TUNED

01:FM 98.50MHz

NOTE

“No Presets” appears on the front display when no radio stations are registered.

Registering FM radio stations automatically (FM Auto

Preset)

Automatically register FM radio stations with strong signals.

NOTE

▪ You can register up to 40 radio stations as presets.

▪ (U.K., Europe, Russia and Middle East models only)

Only Radio Data System broadcasting stations are registered automatically by the Auto Preset function.

Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.

Press BAND to select the FM band.

“TUNER” is selected as the input source and the frequency currently

selected is displayed on the front display.

Press OPTION.

Use the cursor keys to select “Preset” and press ENTER.

ENHANCER

LINK

ECO

MASTER

OUT

YPAO

VOL.

DRC

SLEEP

STEREO

PARTY

TUNED

ZONE

3 B2 A

FPR

SBL SB SBR

FPL

MUT E VIR TUAL

VOL .

Preset

The preset number from which to start the registration is displayed on the

front display.

NOTE

To specify the preset number from which to start the registration, press cursor keys or PRESET to

select a preset number.

To start the Auto Preset process, press ENTER.

ENHANCER

LINK

ECO

MASTER

OUT

YPAO

VOL.

DRC

SLEEP

PARTY

ZONE

3 B2 A

MUT E VIR TUAL

STEREO

TUNED

FPR

SBL SB SBR

FPL

VOL .

01:FM 87.50MHz

“SEARCH” appears during Auto Preset

Preset number from which to start the registration

The Auto Preset process starts and “SEARCH” appears during Auto

Preset.

NOTE

To cancel the Auto Preset process, press RETURN.

When the Auto Preset process finishes, “FINISH” appears on the front display and the

“Option” menu closes automatically.

ENHANCER

LINK

ECO

MASTER

OUT

YPAO

VOL.

DRC

SLEEP

STEREO

PARTY

TUNED

ZONE

3 B2 A

FPR

SBL SB SBR

FPL

MUT E VIR TUAL

VOL .

Auto Preset

Registering an FM radio station manually

Select an FM radio station manually and register it to a preset number.

NOTE

You can register up to 40 radio stations as presets.

Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.

Press BAND to select the FM band.

“TUNER” is selected as the input source and the frequency currently

selected is displayed on the front display.

Press TUNING to set a frequency.

Hold down the key for about a second to search stations automatically.

Hold down MEMORY for a few seconds.

The first time that you do register an FM radio station, the selected radio

station will be registered to the preset number “01”. Thereafter, each radio

station you select will be registered to the next empty (unused) preset

number after the most recently registered number.

PRES ET

BAND TUNINGTUNING

MEMORY

RED GREEN

YELLOW

BLUE

POP-UP

/MENU

HOME

TOP

VOLUME

BLUETOOTH

NET USBTUNER

INPUT

PROGR AM

SUR. DECODE

BASS

ENHANCER

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

SCENE

4321

8765

HDMI OUT

PARTY

SLEEP

MAIN

ZONE 2

PRES ET

BAND

TUNING

MEMORY

RED

GREEN

YELLOW

BLUE

POP-UP

/MENU

HOME

TOP

VOLUME

BLUETOOTH

NET

USB

TUNER

INPUT

PROGR AM

SUR. DECODE

BASS

ENHANCER

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

SCENE

HDMI OUT

PARTY

SLEEP

MAIN

ZONE 2

PRES ET

BANDBAND TUNINGTUNING TUNINGTUNING

MEMORYMEMORY

RED GREEN

YELLOW

BLUE

POP-UP

/MENU

HOME

TOP

VOLUME

BLUETOOTH

NET USBTUNER

INPUT

PROGR AM

SUR. DECODE

BASS

ENHANCER

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

SCENE

4321

8765

HDMI OUT

PARTY

SLEEP

MAIN

ZONE 2

BAND TUNINGTUNING

MEMORY

VOLUME

PROGRAM

SUR. DECODE

BASS

ENHANCER

STRAIGHT

AND T

NIN

MEM

UR. DE

ODE

ENHAN

TRAI

BANDBAND TUNINGTUNING TUNINGTUNING

MEMORYMEMORY

VOLUME

PROGRAM

SUR. DECODE

BASS

ENHANCER

STRAIGHT

BANDBAND

BAND

BBB

ANANAN

DDD

TUNING

TTT

UUU

NIN

NINNINNIN

GGG

TUNING

TTT

UUU

NIN

NINNINNIN

GGG

OLUME

PROGRAM

SUR. DECODE

UR. DE

BASS

SSSS

ENHANCER

ENHA

STRAIGHT

MEMORY

ENHANCER

LINK

ECO

MASTER

OUT

YPAO

VOL.

DRC

SLEEP

PARTY

ZONE

3 B2 A

MUT E VIR TUAL

FPR

SBL SB SBR

FPL

VOL .

01:FM 98.50MHz

STEREO

TUNED

Preset number

NOTE

To select a preset number for registering, press MEMORY once after tuning into the desired radio

station, press PRESET

to select a preset number, and then press MEMORY again.

ENHANCER

LINK

ECO

MASTER

OUT

YPAO

VOL.

DRC

PARTY

ZONE

3 B2 A

FPR

SBL SB SBR

FPL

MUT E VIR TUAL

SLEEP

VOL .

02:Empty

TUNED

STEREO

“Empty” (not in use) or the frequency currently registered

This completes the registers.

Clearing preset FM radio stations

Clear FM radio stations registered to the preset numbers.

Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.

Press BAND to select the FM band.

“TUNER” is selected as the input source and the frequency currently

selected is displayed on the front display.

Press OPTION.

Use the cursor keys to select “Preset” and press ENTER.

ENHANCER

LINK

ECO

MASTER

OUT

YPAO

VOL.

DRC

SLEEP

STEREO

PARTY

TUNED

ZONE

3 B2 A

FPR

SBL SB SBR

FPL

MUT E VIR TUAL

VOL .

Preset

Use the cursor keys to select “CLEAR”.

Use the cursor keys to select a preset station to be cleared and

press ENTER.

ENHANCER

LINK

ECO

MASTER

OUT

YPAO

VOL.

DRC

SLEEP

PARTY

ZONE

3 B2 A

MUT E VIR TUA L

FPR

SBL SB SBR

FPL

VOL .

STEREO

TUNED

01:FM 98.50MHz

Preset station to be cleared

If the preset station is cleared, “Cleared” appears and then the next in-use

preset number is displayed.

01:Cleared

Repeat step 6 until all desired preset stations are cleared.

Press OPTION.

This completes the clearing preset stations.

Clearing all preset FM radio stations

Clear all the FM radio stations registered to the preset numbers.

Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.

Press BAND to select the FM band.

“TUNER” is selected as the input source and the frequency currently

selected is displayed on the front display.

Press OPTION.

Use the cursor keys to select “Preset” and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys to select “CLEAR ALL”.

Use the cursor keys to select “Execute” and press ENTER.

If all the preset stations are cleared, “CLEAR ALL” appears and the

“Option” menu closes automatically.

Displaying the Radio Data System information

(U.K., Europe, Russia and Middle East models only)

Radio Data System is a data transmission system used by FM stations in many

countries. The unit can receive various types of Radio Data System data, such as

“Program Service”, “Program Type”, “Radio Text

” and “Clock Time

”, when it is tuned

into a Radio Data System broadcasting station.

Tune into the desired Radio Data System broadcasting station.

NOTE

We recommend using “Auto Preset” to tune into the Radio Data System broadcasting stations. For

details, see the following:

▪ “Registering FM radio stations automatically (FM Auto Preset)” (p.77)

Press INFO on the front panel to select between the various

display items.

ENHANCER

LINK

ECO

MASTER

OUT

YPAO

VOL.

DRC

SLEEP

PARTY

ZONE

3 B2 A

MUT E VIR TUA L

FPR

SBL SB SBR

FPL

VOL .

STEREO

TUNED

Program Type

Item name

About 3 seconds after a display item is selected, its corresponding

information appears on the front display.

ENHANCER

LINK

ECO

MASTER

OUT

YPAO

VOL.

DRC

SLEEP

PARTY

ZONE

3 B2 A

MUT E VIR TUA L

FPR

SBL SB SBR

FPL

VOL .

STEREO

TUNED

Classics

Information

Program Service

Program service name

Program Type

Current program type

Radio Text

Information on the current program

Clock Time

Current time

DSP Program

Sound mode name

Audio Decoder

Decoder name

Frequency

NOTE

“Program Service”, “Program Type”, “Radio Text”, and “Clock Time” are not displayed if the radio

station does not provide the Radio Data System service.

Playing back music stored on a Bluetooth® device

Playback Bluetooth® device music on the unit

You can play back music files stored on a Bluetooth device (such as smartphones) on

the unit.

Bluetooth device

(such as smartphones)

The unit

NOTE

▪ Use the wireless antennas that are standing upright for connecting to a Bluetooth device wirelessly. For

details, see the following:

– “Preparing wireless antennas (wireless connection)” (p.37)

▪ To use the Bluetooth function, turn on the Bluetooth function of a Bluetooth device.

▪ To use the Bluetooth function, set “Bluetooth” in the “Setup” menu to “On”. For details, see the following:

– “Setting the use of Bluetooth

” (p.136)

▪ For details on supported Bluetooth devices, see the following:

– “Supported Bluetooth

devices” (p.188

)

Press

BLUETOOTH to select “Bluetooth” as the input source.

On the Bluetooth device, select the unit (network name of the

unit).

A connection between the Bluetooth device and the unit will be made.

If the pass key is required, enter the number “0000”.

On the Bluetooth device, select a song and start playback.

The playback screen is displayed on the TV.

NOTE

▪ If the unit detects the Bluetooth device previously connected, the unit automatically connects to

the Bluetooth device after Step 1. To establish another Bluetooth connection, first terminate the

current Bluetooth connection.

▪ To terminate the Bluetooth connection, perform one of the following operations.

– Perform the disconnect operation on the Bluetooth device.

– Select an input source other than “Bluetooth” on the unit.

– Select “Disconnect” in “Audio Receive” in the “Setup” menu.

Enjoying audio using Bluetooth® speakers/

headphones

You can enjoy audio played back on the unit using Bluetooth speakers/headphones.

Bluetooth speakers/headphones

The unit

NOTE

▪ Sounds will be also output from the speakers connected to the unit.

▪ AirPlay and DSD audio cannot be delivered.

▪ You cannot use the Bluetooth audio transmitter function and the Bluetooth audio receiver function at the

same time.

Use the input selection keys on the remote control to select an

input source.

Select an input source other than Bluetooth.

Press SETUP.

Use the cursor keys to select “Bluetooth” and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys to select “Audio Send” and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys to select “Transmitter” and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys to select “On” and press RETURN.

Use the cursor keys to select “Device Search” and press ENTER

to search the Bluetooth devices.

The list of Bluetooth devices is displayed.

Use the cursor keys to display the desired Bluetooth speakers/

headphones and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to check the Bluetooth speakers/

headphones to be connected with the unit.

Use the cursor keys to select “CONNECT” and press ENTER.

When the connection process finishes, “Completed” is displayed and

audio played back on the unit will be reproduced from the Bluetooth

speakers/headphones.

NOTE

If the desired Bluetooth device is not displayed on the list, set the Bluetooth device to the pairing

mode and then perform “Device Search” operation again.

Press SETUP.

This completes the settings.

NOTE

▪ When the Pure Direct is enabled, input sources other than the network sources and USB cannot be

delivered.

▪ To terminate the Bluetooth connection, perform one of the following operations.

– Perform the disconnect operation on the Bluetooth speakers/headphones.

– Press the SETUP key, then use the cursor keys to select "Bluetooth", then "Transmitter", and then "Off".

Playing back music with AirPlay

Playback of iTunes/iPhone music contents with

AirPlay

The AirPlay allows you to play back iTunes or iPhone/iPad/iPod touch music on the unit

via network.

iTunes

(Wired network or wireless network)

iPhone/iPad/iPod touch

The unit

Router

NOTE

For details on supported iPhone devices, see the following:

▪ “Supported AirPlay devices” (p.188)

Start iTunes on the PC or display the playback screen on the

iPhone.

On the iTunes/iPhone, click (tap) the AirPlay icon and select the

unit (network name of the unit) as the audio output device.

iOS 10 (example) iTunes (example)

Select a song and start playback.

The unit automatically selects “AirPlay” as the input source and starts

playback.

The playback screen is displayed on the TV.

CAUTION

▪ When you use iTunes/iPhone controls to adjust volume, the volume may be unexpectedly loud. This

could result in damage to the unit or speakers. If the volume suddenly increases during playback, stop

playback on the iTunes/iPhone immediately. We recommend volume controls from iTunes/iPhone

within the limited range by setting “

AirPlay Volume Interlock” in the “Setup” menu.

NOTE

▪ You can turn on the unit automatically when starting playback on iTunes or iPhone. For details on the

settings, see the following:

– “Setting the use of the Network Standby function” (p.133)

▪ You can edit the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on iTunes/iPhone. For details,

see the following:

– “Setting the network name of the unit” (p.135)

▪ You can adjust the unit’s volume from the iTunes/iPhone during playback. To disable volume controls from

iTunes/iPhone, see the following:

– “Setting the use of volume control via AirPlay” (p.134)

Playing back music stored on a USB storage device

Playback of USB storage device contents

You can play back music files stored on a USB storage device on the unit.

NOTE

For details on playable USB devices and USB file formats, see the following:

▪ “Supported USB devices” (p.188)

▪ “Supported file formats” (p.189)

Connect the USB storage device to the USB jack.

PHONES

TONE CONTROL

USB

SILENT

CINEMA

PROGRAM

The unit (front)

USB storage device

NOTE

▪ If the USB storage device contains many files, it may take time to load them. In this case,

“Loading…” appears on the front display.

▪

Stop playback of the USB storage device before disconnecting it from the USB jack.

▪ Connect a USB storage device directly to the USB jack of the unit. Do not use extension cables.

▪ The unit cannot charge USB devices while it is in standby mode.

Press USB to select “USB” as the input source.

The browse screen is displayed on the TV.

NOTE

If playback is ongoing on your USB storage device, the playback screen is displayed.

Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER.

If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback screen is

displayed.

NOTE

To return to the top level while on the browse screen, hold down RETURN.

NOTE

▪ You can configure the shuffle/repeat settings for playback of contents. For details, see the following:

– “Configuring the shuffle setting” (p.100)

– “Configuring the repeat setting” (p.100)

▪ You can register contents as shortcuts and access them directly. For details, see the following:

– “Registering a favorite content as shortcut” (p.92)

Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)

Media sharing setup on media servers (PCs/NAS)

To play back music files stored on your media servers, first you need to configure the

media sharing setting on each music server.

The setting procedure may vary depending on the media server. The following

procedure is a setup example for Windows Media Player 12.

NOTE

▪ For a media server with software except Windows Media Player installed, refer to the instruction manual

for the device or software and configure the media sharing settings.

▪ The setting procedure may vary depending on the view setting of Windows Media Player or the settings of

PC.

Start Windows Media Player 12 on your PC.

Select “Stream”, then “Turn on media streaming”.

Click “Turn on media streaming”.

Select “Allowed” from the drop-down list next to the unit’s model

name.

Click “OK” to exit.

This completes the settings.

NOTE

For details on media sharing settings, refer to Windows Media Player help.

Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/

NAS)

You can play back music files stored on your media server on the unit.

NOTE

▪ You need to configure the media sharing setting on each music server in advance. For details, see the

following:

– “Media sharing setup on media servers (PCs/NAS)” (p.85)

▪ To use this function, the unit and your PC must be connected to the same router. You can check whether

the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly assigned to the unit. For details, see the

following:

– “Checking the network information on the unit” (p.132)

▪ The audio may be interrupted while using the wireless network connection. In this case, use the wired

network connection.

▪ For details on playable file formats, see the following:

– “Supported file formats” (p.189)

Press NET to select “SERVER” as the input source.

The browse screen is displayed on the TV.

NOTE

If playback of a music file selected from the unit is ongoing on your PC, the playback screen is

displayed.

Use the cursor keys to select a music server and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER.

If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback screen is

displayed.

NOTE

To return to the top level while on the browse screen, hold down RETURN.

NOTE

▪ You can configure the shuffle/repeat settings for playback of contents. For details, see the following:

– “Configuring the shuffle setting” (p.100)

– “Configuring the repeat setting” (p.100)

▪ You can also use the Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control playback. For details, see the following:

– “Setting the use of a Digital Media Controller” (p.134)

▪ You can register contents as shortcuts and access them directly. For details, see the following:

– “Registering a favorite content as shortcut” (p.92)

Listening to Internet radio

Selecting an Internet radio station

Select an Internet radio station and start playback.

NOTE

▪ To use this function, the unit must be connected to the Internet. You can check whether the network

parameters (such as the IP address) are properly assigned to the unit. For details, see the following:

– “Checking the network information on the unit” (p.132)

▪ You may not be able to receive some Internet radio stations.

▪ The unit uses the airable.Radio service. airable is a service of Tune In GmbH.

▪ This service may be discontinued without notice.

▪ Folder names are different depending on the language.

Press NET to select “NET RADIO” as the input source.

The browse screen is displayed on the TV.

Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER.

If an Internet radio station is selected, playback starts and the playback

screen is displayed.

NOTE

To return to the top level while on the browse screen, hold down RETURN.

Registering favorite Internet radio stations

You can register the Internet radio station in playback at present to the “Favorites”

folder.

While listening to Internet radio, press OPTION.

Use the cursor keys to select “Add to favorites” and press

ENTER.

On the playback screen, the current station is added to the “Favorites”

folder. On the browse screen, the station selected in the list is added to

the “Favorites” folder.

When the registering process finishes, the “Option” menu closes

automatically.

NOTE

▪ Radio stations registered to favorites are displayed with “«”.

▪ To remove a station that is registered to favorites, select the station and then select “Remove from

favorites

”.

▪

You can register Internet radio stations as shortcuts and access them directly. For details, see the

following:

– “Registering a favorite content as shortcut” (p.92)

Listening to music streaming services

Listening to a streaming service

You can listen to a streaming service with the MusicCast CONTROLLER on your

mobile device. On the MusicCast CONTROLLER screen, select the room name that

was specified for the unit, and then select the streaming service to be tuned into by its

station name. For details, see the MusicCast CONTROLLER app.

NOTE

▪ Service is limited to certain areas.

▪ Services supported with the unit may not be available depending upon some regions where the unit is

purchased.

▪ Service may change or be discontinued without notice.

▪ After registering the unit in the MusicCast CONTROLLER app, you can use the streaming service. For

details, see the following:

– “Adding the unit to the MusicCast network” (p.49)

▪ To use this function, the unit must be connected to the Internet. You can check whether the network

parameters (such as the IP address) are properly assigned to the unit. For details, see the following:

– “Checking the network information on the unit” (p.132)

▪ For details on music streaming services, see the supplements for streaming services. Access the Yamaha

Downloads site to download the supplement.

http://download.yamaha.com/

Useful playback functions

SCENE function

Selecting the input source and favorite settings with

one touch (SCENE)

The SCENE function allows you to select the following settings with just one touch.

• Input source

• Registered content

• Sound program

• Pure Direct On/Off

• Compressed Music Enhancer On/Off

• HDMI output jack

You can register eight SCENE functions that are assigned to eight SCENE keys on the

remote control respectively.

Selecting a registered scene

Press numbered key (1 to 8), and then the input source and settings registered to the

corresponding scene are directly selected. The unit turns on automatically when it is in

standby mode.

NOTE

To control Zone2, set MAIN/ZONE 2 to “ZONE 2”.

Alternatively, you can also select a registered scene by pressing SCENE repeatedly.

Press SCENE repeatedly.

The SCENE name appears on the front display and on the TV.

To select a desired SCENE name, press ENTER.

PRES ET

BAND TUNINGTUNING

MEMORY

RED GREEN

YELLOW

BLUE

POP-UP

/MENU

HOME

TOP

VOLUME

BLUETOOTH

NET USBTUNER

INPUT

PROGR AM

SUR. DECODE

BASS

ENHANCER

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

SCENE

4321

8765

HDMI OUT

PARTY

SLEEP

MAIN

ZONE 2

PRES ET

BAND

TUNING

MEMORY

RED

GREEN

YELLOW

BLUE

POP-UP

/MENU

HOME

TOP

VOLUME

BLUETOOTH

NET

USB

TUNER

INPUT

PROGR AM

SUR. DECODE

BASS

ENHANCER

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

SCENE

HDMI OUT

PARTY

SLEEP

MAIN

ZONE 2

PRES ET

BANDBAND TUNINGTUNING TUNINGTUNING

MEMORYMEMORY

RED GREEN

YELLOW

BLUE

POP-UP

/MENU

HOME

TOP

VOLUME

BLUETOOTH

NET USBTUNER

INPUT

PROGR AM

SUR. DECODE

BASS

ENHANCER

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

SCENE

4321

8765

HDMI OUT

PARTY

SLEEP

MAIN

ZONE 2

INPUT

PURE DIRECT

SCENE

4321

8765

HDMI OUT

PARTY

SLEEP

MAIN

ZONE 2

INPUT

URE DIRE

HDMI OU

PARTY

LEEP

MAIN

ZONE 2

INPUT

PURE DIRECT

SCENE

432

8765

HDMI OUT

PARTY

SLEEP

MAIN

ZONE 2

INPU

PURE DIRECT

URE DIR

HDMI OU

PART

SLEEP

MAI

ZONE

SCENE

NOTE

▪ To cancel the operation of selecting a registered scene, press RETURN.

▪ The operation is canceled automatically when you have not operated the unit for the 30 seconds.

By default, the following settings are registered for each scene.

Main Zone

SCENE

SCENE name

Movie Viewing Radio Listening Music Listening

NET Audio

Listening

Input

HDMI1 TUNER AUDIO2 NET RADIO

HDMI output

HDMI OUT 1+2 HDMI OUT 1+2 HDMI OUT 1+2 HDMI OUT 1+2

Sound program

Sci-Fi 7ch Stereo STRAIGHT 7ch Stereo

Pure Direct

Off Off Off Off

Compressed Music

Enhancer

Off On Off On

SCENE

SCENE name

STB Viewing Game Playing TV Viewing

Media Server

Listening

Input

HDMI2 HDMI3 AUDIO1 SERVER

HDMI output

HDMI OUT 1+2 HDMI OUT 1+2 HDMI OUT 1+2 HDMI OUT 1+2

Sound program

Drama Action Game Drama 7ch Stereo

Pure Direct

Off Off Off Off

Compressed Music

Enhancer

Off Off On On

Zone2

SCENE

Input

AV 1 TUNER AUDIO2 NET RADIO

Volume

-40.0 dB -40.0 dB -40.0 dB -40.0 dB

Tone Control

Auto Auto Auto Auto

SCENE

Input

AUDIO3 AUDIO4 AUDIO1 SERVER

Volume

-40.0 dB -40.0 dB -40.0 dB -40.0 dB

Tone Control

Auto Auto Auto Auto

NOTE

▪ You can also select a registered scene 1 to 4 by pressing SCENE numbered key (1 to 4) on the front

panel.

▪ For details on the settings, see the following:

– “Selecting items to be included as the scene assignments” (p.127)

Registering a scene

You can change the default setting and register the function that is assigned to each

numbered key (1 to 8).

NOTE

▪ We recommend registering the scene with playing back the content that you want to register.

▪ To control Zone2, set MAIN/ZONE 2 to “ZONE 2”.

Perform the following operations to prepare the settings you want

to assign to a scene.

▪ Select an input source

▪ Select the assigned radio station or content (when “NET”, “USB”,

“Bluetooth” or “TUNER” is selected for the input source only)

▪ Select a sound Program, straight decode or Pure Direct

▪ Enable/disable Compressed Music Enhancer

▪ Select an HDMI output jack

Hold down the desired numbered key (1 to 8) until “SET

Complete” appears on the front display or on the TV.

ENHANCER

LINK

ECO

MASTER

OUT

YPAO

VOL.

DRC

SLEEP

STEREO

PARTY

TUNED

ZONE

3 B2 A

FPR

SBL SB SBR

FPL

MUT E VIR TUAL

VOL .

SET Complete

This completes the registers.

NOTE

▪ For details on the settings, see the following:

– “Enjoying sound field effects optimized for the type of content” (p.51)

– “Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (Pure Direct)” (p.53)

– “Playing back digitally compressed formats with enriched sound (Compressed Music Enhancer)” (p.54)

– “Selecting an HDMI output jack” (p.62)

▪ You can configure more detailed scene assignments in “Scene” in the “Setup” menu. For details, see the

following:

– “Selecting items to be included as the scene assignments” (p.127)

▪ You can change the SCENE name displayed on the front display or on the TV. For details, see the

following:

– “Renaming the SCENE name” (p.128)

Shortcut function

Registering a favorite content as shortcut

You can register favorite Bluetooth, USB, media server and network content as

shortcuts and access them directly by selecting the shortcut numbers.

NOTE

▪ You can register up to 40 contents as shortcuts.

▪ You can also use the “Favorites” feature to register Internet radio stations. For details, see the following:

– “Registering favorite Internet radio stations” (p.87)

▪ The unit registers Bluetooth or AirPlay as an input source. No individual content can be registered.

Play back a song or a radio station to be registered.

Hold down MEMORY for a few seconds.

PRES ET

BAND TUNINGTUNING

MEMORY

RED GREEN

YELLOW

BLUE

POP-UP

/MENU

HOME

TOP

VOLUME

BLUETOOTH

NET USBTUNER

INPUT

PROGR AM

SUR. DECODE

BASS

ENHANCER

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

SCENE

4321

8765

HDMI OUT

PARTY

SLEEP

MAIN

ZONE 2

PRES ET

BAND

TUNING

MEMORY

RED

GREEN

YELLOW

BLUE

POP-UP

/MENU

HOME

TOP

VOLUME

BLUETOOTH

NET

USB

TUNER

INPUT

PROGR AM

SUR. DECODE

BASS

ENHANCER

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

SCENE

HDMI OUT

PARTY

SLEEP

MAIN

ZONE 2

PRES ET

BANDBAND TUNINGTUNING TUNINGTUNING

MEMORYMEMORY

RED GREEN

YELLOW

BLUE

POP-UP

/MENU

HOME

TOP

VOLUME

BLUETOOTH

NET USBTUNER

INPUT

PROGR AM

SUR. DECODE

BASS

ENHANCER

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

SCENE

4321

8765

HDMI OUT

PARTY

SLEEP

MAIN

ZONE 2

BAND TUNINGTUNING

MEMORY

VOLUME

PROGRAM

SUR. DECODE

BASS

ENHANCER

STRAIGHT

AND T

NIN

MEM

UR. DE

ODE

ENHAN

TRAI

BANDBAND TUNINGTUNING TUNINGTUNING

MEMORYMEMORY

VOLUME

PROGRAM

SUR. DECODE

BASS

ENHANCER

STRAIGHT

BANDBAND

BAND

BBB

ANANAN

DDD

TUNING

TTT

UUU

NIN

NINNINNIN

GGG

TUNING

TTT

UUU

NIN

NINNINNIN

GGG

OLUME

PROGRAM

SUR. DECODE

UR. DE

BASS

SSSS

ENHANCER

ENHA

STRAIGHT

MEMORY

ENHANCER

LINK

ECO

MASTER

OUT

YPAO

VOL.

DRC

SLEEP

PARTY

ZONE

3 B2 A

MUT E VIR TUAL

FPR

SBL SB SBR

FPL

STEREO

TUNED

VOL .

01:Empty

Shortcut number (flashes)

“MEMORY” appears on the front display and the shortcut number to

which the item will be registered blinks.

NOTE

To change a shortcut number to which the item will be registered, use PRESET to select the

shortcut number after step 2.

ENHANCER

LINK

ECO

MASTER

OUT

YPAO

VOL.

DRC

SLEEP

PARTY

ZONE

3 B2 A

MUT E VIR TUAL

FPR

SBL SB SBR

FPL

STEREO

TUNED

VOL .

02:Empty

“Empty” (not in use) or item currently registered

Press MEMORY.

The registered shortcut number and “Memorized” appear on the front

display.

This completes the registers.

Recalling a registered content as shortcut

Recall a registered content (Bluetooth, USB, media server and network content) by

selecting the shortcut number.

NOTE

You can register up to 40 contents as shortcuts.

Press BLUETOOTH, NET or USB.

PRES ET

BAND TUNINGTUNING

MEMORY

RED GREEN

YELLOW

BLUE

POP-UP

/MENU

HOME

TOP

VOLUME

BLUETOOTH

NET USBTUNER

INPUT

PROGR AM

SUR. DECODE

BASS

ENHANCER

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

SCENE

4321

8765

HDMI OUT

PARTY

SLEEP

MAIN

ZONE 2

PRES ET

BAND

TUNING

MEMORY

RED

GREEN

YELLOW

BLUE

POP-UP

/MENU

HOME

TOP

VOLUME

BLUETOOTH

NET

USB

TUNER

INPUT

PROGR AM

SUR. DECODE

BASS

ENHANCER

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

SCENE

HDMI OUT

PARTY

SLEEP

MAIN

ZONE 2

PRES ET

BANDBAND TUNINGTUNING TUNINGTUNING

MEMORYMEMORY

RED GREEN

YELLOW

BLUE

POP-UP

/MENU

HOME

TOP

VOLUME

BLUETOOTH

NET USBTUNER

INPUT

PROGR AM

SUR. DECODE

BASS

ENHANCER

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

SCENE

4321

8765

HDMI OUT

PARTY

SLEEP

MAIN

ZONE 2

PRESET

RED GREEN

YELLOW

BLUE

BLUETOOTH

NET USBTUNER

INPUT

8765

PRE

RED

REE

ELL

LUETOOTH

NET

USB

TUNE

INPU

PRESET

RED GREEN

YELLOW

BLUE

BLUETOOTH

NET USBTUNER

INPUT

8765

RESET

GREE

YELLOW

ELEL

BLUE

TUNER

INPU

NET

USB

BLUETOOTH

Press PRESET to select a desired content.

PRES ET

BAND TUNINGTUNING

MEMORY

RED GREEN

YELLOW

BLUE

POP-UP

/MENU

HOME

TOP

VOLUME

BLUETOOTH

NET USBTUNER

INPUT

PROGR AM

SUR. DECODE

BASS

ENHANCER

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

SCENE

4321

8765

HDMI OUT

PARTY

SLEEP

MAIN

ZONE 2

PRES ET

BAND

TUNING

MEMORY

RED

GREEN

YELLOW

BLUE

POP-UP

/MENU

HOME

TOP

VOLUME

BLUETOOTH

NET

USB

TUNER

INPUT

PROGR AM

SUR. DECODE

BASS

ENHANCER

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

SCENE

HDMI OUT

PARTY

SLEEP

MAIN

ZONE 2

PRES ET

BANDBAND TUNINGTUNING TUNINGTUNING

MEMORYMEMORY

RED GREEN

YELLOW

BLUE

POP-UP

/MENU

HOME

TOP

VOLUME

BLUETOOTH

NET USBTUNER

INPUT

PROGR AM

SUR. DECODE

BASS

ENHANCER

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

SCENE

4321

8765

HDMI OUT

PARTY

SLEEP

MAIN

ZONE 2

PRESET

RED GREEN

YELLOW

BLUE

BLUETOOTH

NET USBTUNER

INPUT

4321

8765

PRE

RED

REE

ELL

LUETOOTH

NET

USB

TUNE

INPUT

PRESET

RED GREEN

YELLOW

BLUE

BLUETOOTH

NET USBTUNER

INPUT

4321

8765

GREE

YELLOW

BLUEBLUE

BLUE

BLUETOOT

NET

TUNER

INPU

PRESET

ENHANCER

LINK

ECO

MASTER

OUT

YPAO

VOL.

DRC

SLEEP

PARTY

ZONE

3 B2 A

MUT E VIR TUAL

FPR

SBL SB SBR

FPL

STEREO

TUNED

VOL .

01:USB

Playback of the selected content starts.

NOTE

▪ “No Presets” appears on the front display when no items are registered.

▪ The registered item cannot be recalled in the following cases.

– A USB storage device which contains the registered item is not connected to this unit.

– A PC which contains the registered item is turned off or not connected to the network.

– The registered network content is temporarily unavailable or out of service.

– The registered item (file) has been deleted or moved to another location.

– A Bluetooth connection cannot be established.

▪ When you register music files stored on a USB storage device or a media server (PC/NAS), this

unit memorizes the relative position of the music files in the folder. If you have added or deleted

any music files to or from the folder, this unit may not recall the music file correctly. In such

cases, register the items again.

▪ The registered content (songs and Internet radio stations) can be displayed as a list and easily

removed by using MusicCast CONTROLLER on your mobile device. For details, see the

following:

– “Using MusicCast CONTROLLER” (p.49)

Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu)

Basic operation of the Option menu

Perform the following basic procedure to operate the “Option” menu. With the “Option”

menu, you can configure different playback settings according to the input source

currently being played back.

Press OPTION.

PRES ET

BAND TUNINGTUNING

MEMORY

RED GREEN

YELLOW

BLUE

POP-UP

/MENU

HOME

TOP

VOLUME

BLUETOOTH

NET USBTUNER

INPUT

PROGR AM

SUR. DECODE

BASS

ENHANCER

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

SCENE

4321

8765

HDMI OUT

PARTY

SLEEP

MAIN

ZONE 2

PRES ET

BAND

TUNING

MEMORY

RED

GREEN

YELLOW

BLUE

POP-UP

/MENU

HOME

TOP

VOLUME

BLUETOOTH

NET

USB

TUNER

INPUT

PROGR AM

SUR. DECODE

BASS

ENHANCER

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

SCENE

HDMI OUT

PARTY

SLEEP

MAIN

ZONE 2

PRES ET

BANDBAND TUNINGTUNING TUNINGTUNING

MEMORYMEMORY

RED GREEN

YELLOW

BLUE

POP-UP

/MENU

HOME

TOP

VOLUME

BLUETOOTH

NET USBTUNER

INPUT

PROGR AM

SUR. DECODE

BASS

ENHANCER

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

SCENE

4321

8765

HDMI OUT

PARTY

SLEEP

MAIN

ZONE 2

POP-UP

/MENU

HOME

TOP

POP-UP

/MENU

HOM

POP-UP

/MENU

HOME

TOP

POP-UP

/MENU

HOME

TOP

OPTION

ENHANCER

LINK

ECO

MASTER

OUT

YPAO

VOL.

DRC

SLEEP

PARTY

ZONE

3 B2 A

MUT E VIR TUAL

FPR

SBL SB SBR

FPL

STEREO

TUNED

VOL .

Tone Control

Front display

TV screen

Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys to select a setting.

Press OPTION.

This completes the settings.

NOTE

For details on the default settings, see the following:

▪ “Default settings of the Option menu” (p.200)

Option menu items

Use the following table to configure playback settings of the unit.

NOTE

▪ Available items vary depending on the selected input source.

▪ When the input icon is displayed on the upper right of the “Option” menu, the setting is applied to the

currently selected input source. Otherwise, the setting is applied to all of the input sources.

▪ Text in parentheses denotes indicators on the front display.

▪ Depending on the region of purchase, some menu items for audio streaming services are also available.

Item Function Page

Tone Control (

Tone Control)

Adjusts the level of high-frequency range and low-

frequency range individually.

p.96

YPAO Volume

(YPAO

Volume)

YPAO Volume

(YPAO Vol.)

Enables/disables YPAO Volume. p.96

Adaptive DRC

(A.DRC)

Sets whether the dynamic range (from maximum to

minimum) is automatically adjusted to the volume.

p.97

Dialogue

(Dialog)

Dialogue Level

(Dialog Lvl)

Adjusts the volume of dialogue sounds. p.97

DTS Dialogue

Control (DTS

Dialog)

Adjusts the volume of dialogue sounds for DTS:X

contents.

p.97

Dialogue Lift

(Dialog Lift)

Adjusts the perceived height of dialogue sounds for

the screen position.

p.98

Lipsync

(Lipsync)

Lipsync

(Lipsync)

Adjusts the delay between video and audio output

manually.

p.98

Enhancer

(Enhancer)

Enhancer

(Enhancer)

Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer. p.98

Volume Trim

(Volume Trim)

Input Trim

(In.Trim)

Corrects volume differences between input sources. p.99

Subwoofer Trim

(SW.Trim)

Fine-adjusts the subwoofer volume. p.99

Extra Bass

(Extra Bass)

Extra Bass

(Extra Bass)

Enables/disables Extra Bass. p.99

Video

Processing

(Video

Process.)

Video Mode

(V.M)

Enables/disables the video signal processing

settings configured in the “Setup” menu.

p.100

Video Out

(Video Out)

Video Out

(V.Out)

Selects a video to be output with the selected audio

source.

p.100

Item Function Page

Shuffle /

Repeat

(Shuffle /

Repeat)

Shuffle (Shuffle)

Configures the shuffle setting. p.100

Repeat

(Repeat)

Configures the repeat setting. p.100

FM Mode

(FM

Mode)

FM Mode

(Mode)

Switches between “Stereo” and “Monaural” for FM

radio reception.

p.101

Preset (Preset)

FM Auto Preset

(AUTO)

Automatically registers FM radio stations with strong

signals as presets.

p.101

Clear Preset

(CLEAR)

Clears radio stations registered to preset numbers. p.102

Clear All Preset

(CLEAR ALL)

Clears all the radio stations registered to preset

numbers.

p.102

Add to favorites (Add to Fav.)

Adds your favorite Internet radio station to the

“Favorites” folder.

p.103

Remove from favorites

(

RemovefromFav.)

Removes it from the “Favorites” folder. p.103

Init Scan (Init Scan)

(U.K., Europe, Russia, Middle East and Australia

models only)

Performs an initial scan for DAB radio reception.

p.103

Tune AID (Tune AID)

(U.K., Europe, Russia, Middle East and Australia

models only)

Checks reception strength of each DAB channel

label.

p.104

On-screen Information

Displays the current status information. p.104

Adjusting the tone of the audio output

Adjusts the level of high-frequency range (Treble) and low-frequency range (Bass)

individually.

Option menu

“Tone Control”

Choices

Treble, Bass

Setting range

-6.0 dB to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)

NOTE

▪ When both “Treble” and “Bass” are 0.0 dB, “Bypass” appears.

▪ You can also adjust the tone with the front panel controls. Press TONE CONTROL to select “Treble” or

“Bass”, then press PROGRAM to make an adjustment.

▪ If you set an extreme value, sounds may not match those from other channels.

Configuring the volume automatically based on the

YPAO measurement results

Adjusting the high- and low-frequency levels

automatically according to the volume

Enables/disables YPAO Volume. When YPAO Volume is enabled, the high- and low-

frequency levels are automatically adjusted according to the volume so that you can

enjoy natural sounds even at low volume. YPAO Volume works effectively after the

YPAO measurement. For details, see the following:

• “Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO)” (p.42)

Option menu

“YPAO Volume” > “YPAO Volume”

Settings

Off Disables YPAO Volume.

On Enables YPAO Volume.

NOTE

We recommend enabling both “YPAO Volume” and “Adaptive DRC” when you are listening at lower volumes

or at night. For details on “Adaptive DRC

”, see the following:

▪

“Adjusting the dynamic range automatically” (p.97)

Adjusting the dynamic range automatically

Sets whether the dynamic range (from maximum to minimum) is automatically adjusted

to the volume when “YPAO Volume” is set to “

On”. When “Adaptive DRC” is set to

“On”, it is useful for listening to playback at a low volume at night.

Option menu

“YPAO Volume” > “Adaptive DRC”

Settings

Off The dynamic range is not automatically adjusted.

On Automatically adjusts the dynamic range.

NOTE

We recommend enabling both “YPAO Volume” and “Adaptive DRC” when you are listening at lower volumes

or at night. For details on “YPAO Volume

”, see the following:

▪

“Adjusting the high- and low-frequency levels automatically according to the volume” (p.96)

Adjusting the volume or perceive height of dialogue

sounds

Adjusting the volume of dialogue sound

Adjusts the volume of dialogue sounds that are hardly heard.

Option menu

“Dialogue” > “Dialogue Level”

Setting range

0 to 3 (higher to strengthen)

NOTE

This setting is not available when one of the following conditions is met.

▪ Dolby Atmos content or DTS:X content is played back.

▪ The Dolby Surround or Neural:X decoder is working.

Adjusting the volume of dialogue sound during DTS:X™

playback

Adjusts the volume of dialogue sounds that are hardly heard for DTS:X content.

Option menu

“Dialogue” > “DTS Dialogue Control”

Setting range

0 to 6 (higher to strengthen)

NOTE

This setting is available only when DTS:X content which supports the DTS Dialogue Control feature is played

back.

Adjusting the perceived height of dialogue sound

Adjusts the perceived height of dialogue sounds when the position (height) of dialogue

sound is artificial. If the dialogue sounds as if it is coming from below the screen, you

can raise its perceived height by increasing this setting.

NOTE

This setting is available only when one of the following conditions is met.

▪ One of the sound programs (except for 2ch Stereo and 7ch Stereo) is selected when presence speakers

are used.

▪ Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) is working.

(You may hear dialogue sounds from the surround speakers depending on the listening position.)

Option menu

“Dialogue” > “Dialogue Lift”

Setting range

0 to 5 (The bigger the value the higher the position)

Ideal position

Adjusting the delay of the Lipsync function

Adjusts the delay between video and audio output manually when “Delay Enable” in

the “Setup” menu is set to “Enable”.

Option menu

“Lipsync” > “Lipsync”

Setting range

0 ms to 500 ms (1 ms increments)

NOTE

For details on “Delay Enable” in the “Setup” menu, see the following:

▪ “Enabling Lipsync adjustment” (p.117)

Setting Compressed Music Enhancer

Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer.

Option menu

“Enhancer” > “Enhancer”

Settings

Off Disables Compressed Music Enhancer.

On Enables Compressed Music Enhancer.

NOTE

▪ This setting is applied separately to each input source.

▪ You can also use ENHANCER on the remote control to enable/disable Compressed Music Enhancer.

▪ For details on Compressed Music Enhancer, see the following:

– “Playing back digitally compressed formats with enriched sound (Compressed Music Enhancer)” (p.54)

Correcting volume differences during playback

Correcting volume differences between input sources

Corrects volume differences between input sources. If you are bothered by volume

differences when switching between input sources, use this function to correct it.

Option menu

“Volume Trim” > “Input Trim”

Setting range

-6.0 dB to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)

NOTE

This setting is applied separately to each input source.

Adjusting the subwoofer volume

Fine-adjusts the subwoofer volume.

Option menu

“Volume Trim” > “Subwoofer Trim”

Setting range

-6.0 dB to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)

Setting the use of Extra Bass

Enables/disables Extra Bass. When Extra Bass is enabled, you can enjoy enhanced

bass sounds, regardless of the size of the front speakers and the presence or

absence of the subwoofer.

Option menu

“Extra Bass” > “Extra Bass”

Settings

Off Disables Extra Bass.

On Enables Extra Bass.

NOTE

You can also use BASS on the remote control to enable/disable Extra Bass.

Enabling the video signal processing

Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution and aspect ratio) settings

configured in “Resolution

” and “Aspect” in the “Setup” menu. For details, see the

following:

• “Setting a resolution to output HDMI video signals” (p.129)

• “Setting an aspect ratio to output HDMI video signals” (p.130)

Option menu

“Video Processing” > “Video Mode”

Settings

Direct Disables the video signal processing.

Processing Enables the video signal processing.

Selecting a video source to be output with the

selected audio source

Selects a video source to be output together with the selected audio source. For

example, you can watch the video from a different source while listening to the radio.

Option menu

“Video Out” > “Video Out”

Input sources

AUX, AUDIO 1-5, PHONO, TUNER, (network sources), AirPlay, MusicCast Link,

SERVER,

NET RADIO, Bluetooth, USB

Settings

Off Does not output video.

HDMI 1-7, AV 1-2

Outputs video input through the corresponding video input jacks.

Configuring the shuffle/repeat setting

Configuring the shuffle setting

Configure the shuffle setting for playback.

Option menu

“Shuffle / Repeat” > “Shuffle”

Settings

Off Turns off the shuffle function.

On Plays back songs in the current album (folder) in random order.

NOTE

This setting is available only when “USB” or “SERVER” is selected as the input source.

Configuring the repeat setting

Configure the repeat setting for playback.

Option menu

“Shuffle / Repeat” > “Repeat”

Settings

Off Turns off the repeat function.

One Plays back the current song repeatedly.

All Plays back all songs in the current album (folder) repeatedly.

NOTE

This setting is available only when “USB” or “SERVER” is selected as the input source.

100

Switching between stereo and monaural for FM radio

reception

Switch between stereo and monaural for FM radio reception. When the signal

reception for an FM radio station is unstable, switching to monaural may improve it.

Option menu

“FM Mode” > “FM Mode”

Settings

Stereo Enables stereo for FM radio reception.

Monaural Enables monaural for FM radio reception.

Setting presets for radio stations

Registering FM radio stations automatically

Automatically register FM radio stations with strong signals.

NOTE

▪ You can register up to 40 radio stations as presets.

▪ To register AM radio stations, see the following:

– “Registering a radio station manually” (p.68)

▪ (U.K., Europe, Russia and Middle East models only)

Only Radio Data System broadcasting stations are registered automatically by the Auto Preset function.

Option menu

“Preset” > “FM Auto Preset”

Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.

“TUNER” is selected as the input source and the frequency currently

selected is displayed on the front display.

Press OPTION.

Use the cursor keys to select “Preset” and press ENTER.

ENHANCER

LINK

ECO

MASTER

OUT

YPAO

VOL.

DRC

SLEEP

STEREO

PARTY

TUNED

ZONE

3 B2 A

FPR

SBL SB SBR

FPL

MUT E VIR TUAL

VOL .

Preset

The preset number from which to start the registration is displayed on the

front display.

NOTE

To specify the preset number from which to start the registration, press cursor keys or PRESET to

select a preset number.

To start the Auto Preset process, press ENTER.

ENHANCER

LINK

ECO

MASTER

OUT

YPAO

VOL.

DRC

SLEEP

PARTY

ZONE

3 B2 A

MUT E VIR TUAL

STEREO

TUNED

FPR

SBL SB SBR

FPL

VOL .

01:FM 87.50MHz

“SEARCH” appears during Auto Preset

Preset number from which to start the registration

The Auto Preset process starts and “SEARCH” appears during Auto

Preset.

NOTE

To cancel the Auto Preset process, press RETURN.

When the Auto Preset process finishes, “FINISH” appears on the front display and the

“Option” menu closes automatically.

ENHANCER

LINK

ECO

MASTER

OUT

YPAO

VOL.

DRC

SLEEP

STEREO

PARTY

TUNED

ZONE

3 B2 A

FPR

SBL SB SBR

FPL

MUT E VIR TUAL

VOL .

Auto Preset

101

Clearing preset stations

Clear radio stations registered to the preset numbers.

Option menu

“Preset” > “Clear Preset”

Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.

“TUNER” is selected as the input source and the frequency currently

selected is displayed on the front display.

Press OPTION.

Use the cursor keys to select “Preset” and press ENTER.

ENHANCER

LINK

ECO

MASTER

OUT

YPAO

VOL.

DRC

SLEEP

STEREO

PARTY

TUNED

ZONE

3 B2 A

FPR

SBL SB SBR

FPL

MUT E VIR TUAL

VOL .

Preset

Use the cursor keys to select “CLEAR”.

Use the cursor keys to select a preset station to be cleared and

press ENTER.

ENHANCER

LINK

ECO

MASTER

OUT

YPAO

VOL.

DRC

SLEEP

PARTY

ZONE

3 B2 A

MUT E VIR TUA L

FPR

SBL SB SBR

FPL

VOL .

STEREO

TUNED

01:FM 98.50MHz

Preset station to be cleared

If the preset station is cleared, “Cleared” appears and then the next in-use

preset number is displayed.

01:Cleared

Repeat step 5 until all desired preset stations are cleared.

Press OPTION.

This completes the clearing preset stations.

Clearing all preset stations

Clear all the radio stations registered to the preset numbers.

Option menu

“Preset” > “Clear All Preset”

Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.

“TUNER” is selected as the input source and the frequency currently

selected is displayed on the front display.

Press OPTION.

Use the cursor keys to select “Preset” and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys to select “CLEAR ALL”.

Use the cursor keys to select “Execute” and press ENTER.

If all the preset stations are cleared, “CLEAR ALL” appears and the

“Option” menu closes automatically.

102

Adding an Internet radio station to the “Favorites”

folder

Option menu

“Add to favorites”

While listening to Internet radio, press OPTION.

Use the cursor keys to select “Add to favorites” and press

ENTER.

When the registering process finishes, the “Option” menu closes

automatically.

Removing an Internet radio station from the

“Favorites” folder

Remove an Internet radio station from the “Favorites” folder.

Option menu

“Remove from favorites”

Use the cursor keys to select the station to be removed from the

“Favorites” folder.

Press OPTION.

Use the cursor keys to select “Remove from favorites” and press

ENTER.

When the removing process finishes, the “Option” menu closes

automatically.

Performing an initial scan for DAB radio reception

(U.K., Europe, Russia, Middle East and Australia models only)

Perform an initial scan for searching DAB radio stations.

Option menu

“Init Scan”

Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.

Press BAND to select the DAB band.

Press OPTION.

Use the cursor keys to select “Init Scan” and press ENTER.

Press ENTER to start an initial scan.

When the initial scan finishes, the unit automatically tunes into the first

DAB radio station as stored in station order.

NOTE

▪ If you perform an initial scan again, the DAB radio stations currently registered to the preset numbers will

be cleared.

▪ If no DAB radio stations are found by an initial scan, press ENTER to start an initial scan again.

103

Checking reception strength of each DAB channel

label

(U.K., Europe, Russia, Middle East and Australia models only)

You can check reception strength of each DAB channel label.

Option menu

“Tune AID”

Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.

Press BAND to select the DAB band.

Press OPTION.

Use the cursor keys to select “Tune AID” and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys to select the desired DAB channel label.

The reception strength of DAB channel label is displayed in 0 (none) to

100 (best).

Press RETURN.

This completes the checking.

Checking the current status information

Displays the current status information as follows.

Option menu

“On-screen Information”

Press OPTION.

Use the cursor keys to select “On-screen Information” and press

ENTER.

The following information is displayed on the TV.

Input source/Party

mode status CINEMA DSP status

Volume/YPAO

Volume status

Audio format Decoder Sound mode

To close the information display, press RETURN.

NOTE

▪ You can use the PROGRAM key on the remote control for displaying the status information on the TV. For

details, see the following:

– “Setting the function for the PROGRAM key on the remote control” (p.146)

▪ Use the left/right cursor keys to display other informations in the “Setup” menu on the TV.

104

CONFIGURATIONS

Configuring various functions (Setup menu)

Basic operation of the Setup menu

Perform the following basic procedure to operate the “Setup” menu. You can configure

the unit’s various functions with the “Setup” menu.

NOTE

▪ If new firmware is available, the message screen appears.

▪

If new firmware is available, the envelope icon (p) appears in the screen.

▪ For details on firmware updating, see the following:

– “Firmware updates” (p.170)

Press SETUP.

PRES ET

BAND TUNINGTUNING

MEMORY

RED GREEN

YELLOW

BLUE

POP-UP

/MENU

HOME

TOP

VOLUME

BLUETOOTH

NET USBTUNER

INPUT

PROGR AM

SUR. DECODE

BASS

ENHANCER

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

SCENE

4321

8765

HDMI OUT

PARTY

SLEEP

MAIN

ZONE 2

PRES ET

BAND

TUNING

MEMORY

RED

GREEN

YELLOW

BLUE

POP-UP

/MENU

HOME

TOP

VOLUME

BLUETOOTH

NET

USB

TUNER

INPUT

PROGR AM

SUR. DECODE

BASS

ENHANCER

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

SCENE

HDMI OUT

PARTY

SLEEP

MAIN

ZONE 2

PRES ET

BANDBAND TUNINGTUNING TUNINGTUNING

MEMORYMEMORY

RED GREEN

YELLOW

BLUE

POP-UP

/MENU

HOME

TOP

VOLUME

BLUETOOTH

NET USBTUNER

INPUT

PROGR AM

SUR. DECODE

BASS

ENHANCER

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

SCENE

4321

8765

HDMI OUT

PARTY

SLEEP

MAIN

ZONE 2

POP-UP

/MENU

HOME

TOP

POP-UP

/MENU

HOM

POP-UP

/MENU

HOME

TOP

POP-UP

/MENU

HOME

TOP

SETUP

Use the cursor keys to select a menu and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys to select a setting and press ENTER.

Press SETUP.

This completes the settings.

NOTE

For details on the default settings, see the following:

▪ “Default settings of the Setup menu” (p.200)

105

Setup menu items

Use the following table to configure various functions of the unit.

Menu Item Function Page

Speaker

Power Amp Assign

Selects a speaker system. p.110

Configuration

Front

Selects the size of the front speakers. p.110

Center

Selects whether or not a center speaker is connected and its size. p.111

Surround

Selects whether or not surround speakers are connected and their size. p.111

Surround Back

Selects whether or not surround back speakers are connected and their size. p.112

Front Presence

Selects whether or not presence speakers are connected and their size. p.113

Subwoofer

Selects whether or not a subwoofer is connected. p.114

Distance

Sets the distance between each speaker and listening position. p.114

Level

Adjusts the volume of each speaker. p.114

Parametric EQ

Adjusts the tone with an equalizer. p.115

Test Tone

Enables/disables the test tone output. p.116

YPAO Result

Checks and Reloades the previous YPAO adjustments. p.116

Sound

Information

Displays information about the current audio signal. p.117

Lipsync

Delay Enable

Enables/disables the “Lipsync” adjustment configured in “Auto/Manual Select”. p.117

Auto/Manual Select

Selects the method to adjust the delay between video and audio output. p.118

Adjustment

Adjusts the delay between video and audio output manually. p.118

DSP Parameter

DSP Level

Adjusts the sound field effect level. p.120

Initial Delay

Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and presence sound field generation. p.120

Room Size

Adjusts the broadening effect of the presence sound field. p.120

Liveness

Adjusts the loss of the presence sound field. p.121

Reverb Time

Adjusts the decay time of the rear reverberant sound. p.121

Reverb Delay

Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and reverberant sound generation. p.121

Reverb Level

Adjusts the volume of the reverberant sound. p.121

Surround Initial Delay

Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and surround sound field generation. p.122

Surround Room Size

Adjusts the broadening effect of the surround sound field. p.122

Surround Liveness

Adjusts the loss of the surround sound field. p.122

Surround Back Initial

Delay

Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and surround back sound field generation. p.122

Surround Back Room Size

Adjusts the broadening effect of the surround back sound field. p.123

Surround Back Liveness

Adjusts the loss of the surround back sound field. p.123

106

Menu Item Function Page

Sound

Surround Decoder

Decode Type

Selects a surround decoder to be used. p.123

Center Spread

Selects whether to spread the center channel signals to left and right when 2-channel source is played. p.124

Center Image

Adjusts the center localization (broadening effect) of the front sound field. p.124

7ch Stereo

Level

Adjusts the entire volume for “7ch Stereo”. p.124

Front / Rear Balance

Adjusts the front and rear volume balance for “7ch Stereo”. p.124

Left / Right Balance

Adjusts the left and right volume balance for “7ch Stereo”. p.124

Height Balance

Adjusts the height volume balance using the presence speakers for “7ch Stereo”. p.125

Monaural Mix

Enables/disables monaural sound output for “7ch Stereo”. p.125

Dynamic Range

Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for bitstream audio (Dolby Digital and DTS signals) playback. p.125

Volume

Max Volume

Sets the limit value of the volume. p.125

Initial Volume

Sets the initial volume for when this receiver is turned on. p.126

Adaptive DSP Level

Selects whether to automatically adjust the CINEMA DSP 3D effect level when the volume is adjusted. p.126

Virtual Speaker VSBS

Selects whether to create Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) using the surround speakers. p.126

Scene

Scene Setting

Selects items to be included as the scene assignments. p.127

Scene Rename

Renames the scene name displayed on the front display or TV screen. p.128

Video/HDMI

Information

Displays information about the current video signal and the TVs connected to the HDMI OUT jacks. p.129

Video Mode

Enables/disables the video signal processing. p.129

Resolution

Selects a resolution to output HDMI video signals. p.129

Aspect

Selects an aspect ratio to output HDMI video signals. p.130

HDMI Control

Enables/disables HDMI Control. p.130

TV Audio Input

Selects an audio input jack of the unit to be used for TV audio input. p.130

ARC

Enables/disables ARC. p.130

Standby Sync

Selects whether to use HDMI control to link the standby behavior of the TV and the unit. p.131

HDMI Audio Output

Enables/disables the audio output from a TV. p.131

HDCP Version

Selects the version of HDCP used on the HDMI input jacks. p.131

HDMI Standby Through

Selects whether to output videos/audio (input through HDMI jacks) to the TV when the unit is in standby mode. p.131

107

Menu Item Function Page

Network

Information

Displays the network information on the unit. p.132

Network Connection

Selects the network connection method. p.132

IP Address

Configures the network parameters (such as IP address). p.133

Network Standby

Selects whether to enable/disable the function that turns on the unit from other network devices. p.133

MAC Address Filter

Filter

Sets the MAC address filter to limit access to the unit from other network devices. p.134

MAC Address

Sets the MAC address of the network device that is permitted to access the unit. p.134

DMC Control

Selects whether to allow a Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control playback. p.134

AirPlay Volume Interlock

Enables/disables volume controls from iTunes/iPhone via AirPlay. p.134

Network Name

Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on other network devices. p.135

MusicCast Link Power Interlock

Selects whether turning on the power of the master device of the MusicCast network (this unit) also turns on the

power of other devices of the network.

p.135

Bluetooth

Enables/disables the Bluetooth functions. p.136

Audio Receive

Disconnect

Terminates the Bluetooth connection between the Bluetooth device (such as smartphones) and the unit. p.136

Bluetooth Standby

Selects whether to enable/disable the function that turns on the unit from Bluetooth devices (Bluetooth standby). p.136

Audio Send

Transmitter

Enables/disables the Bluetooth audio transmitter function. p.137

Device Search

Searches available Bluetooth devices (speakers/headphones) when the unit is used as a Bluetooth audio transmitter. p.137

Multi Zone

Information

Displays information about Zone2. p.138

Zone2

Volume

Enables/disables volume adjustments for Zone2 output. p.138

Max Volume

Sets the Zone2 limit value of the volumes. p.138

Initial Volume

Sets the Zone2 initial volume for when the unit is turned on. p.139

Audio Delay

Adjusts the audio output timing for Zone2. p.139

Monaural

Switches between stereo and monaural for Zone2 output. p.139

Enhancer

Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer for Zone2 output. p.140

Tone Control

Adjusts the level of high-frequency range and low-frequency range for Zone2 output. p.140

Extra Bass

Enables/disables Extra Bass for Zone2 output. p.140

Left / Right Balance

Adjusts the volume balance for Zone2 output. p.140

Zone Rename

Changes the zone name displayed on the TV screen. p.141

Party Mode Set Target : Zone2

Enables/disables switching to the party mode. p.141

108

Menu Item Function Page

System

Information

Displays the system information on the unit. p.142

Language

Selects an on-screen menu language. p.142

Audio In

Combines the video jack of the selected input source with an audio jack of others. p.143

Input Skip

Sets which input source is skipped when operating the INPUT key. p.144

Input Rename

Changes the input source name displayed on the front display. p.145

Auto Play

Enables/disables Auto Play function in streaming services, Internet radio, media servers (PCs/NAS), Bluetooth and

USB.

p.146

DSP Skip

Sets which sound programs are skipped when operating the PROGRAM key. p.146

Remote Key

PROGRAM Key

Sets the function for the PROGRAM key on the remote control. p.146

Color Key

Set the unit's functions for the RED/GREEN/YELLOW/BLUE key of the remote control. p.147

Display Set

Dimmer (Front Display)

Adjusts the brightness of the front display. p.147

Volume

Switches the scale of the volume display. p.147

Short Message

Selects whether to display short messages on the TV screen when the unit is operated. p.147

Wallpaper

Selects the image to be used as wallpaper on the TV screen. p.147

Trigger Output

Trigger Mode

Specifies the condition for the TRIGGER OUT jack to function. p.148

Target Zone

Specifies the zone with which the TRIGGER OUT jack functions are synchronized. p.148

ECO

Auto Power Standby

Sets the amount of time for the auto-standby function. p.149

ECO Mode

Enables/disables the eco mode (power saving mode). p.149

Memory Guard

Prevents accidental changes to the settings. p.149

Firmware Update

Updates the firmware via the network. p.150

109

Configuring the speaker settings

Setting your speaker system

Select the setting according to the speakers that are connected.

Setup menu

“Speaker” > “Power Amp Assign”

Settings

Basic

Select this option when you use a normal speaker system (not using

Zone2 speakers or a bi-amp connection).

7.1 +1Zone

Select this option when you use Zone2 speakers in addition to the 7.1

system in the main zone.

5.1.2 +1Zone

Select this option when you use Zone2 speakers in addition to the 5.1.2

system in the main zone.

5.1 BI-Amp

Select this option when you connect speakers that support bi-amp

connections.

NOTE

For details on the speaker system, see the following:

▪ “Connecting front speakers that support bi-amp connections” (p.29)

▪ “Connecting Zone2 speakers using the unit’s internal amplifier” (p.56)

Setting the size of the front speakers

Selects the setting according to the size of your front speakers.

Setup menu

“Speaker” > “Configuration” > “Front”

Settings

Small

Select this option for small speakers.

The subwoofer will produce front channel low-frequency components

(configurable in “

Crossover

”).

Large

Select this option for large speakers.

The front speakers will produce all of the front channel frequency

components.

NOTE

▪ When configuring the speaker size, as a general guideline, select “Large” if the woofer diameter of your

speaker is 16 cm (6‑1/4”) or larger, or “Small” if it is smaller than 16 cm (6‑1/4”).

▪ “Front” is automatically set to “Large” when “Subwoofer” is set to “None”. For details on “Subwoofer” in the

“Setup” menu, see the following:

– “Setting the use of a subwoofer” (p.114)

110

Setting the use of a center speaker and its size

Selects the setting according to the use and size of your center speaker.

Setup menu

“Speaker” > “Configuration” > “Center”

Settings

Small

Select this option for small speakers.

The subwoofer or front speakers will produce center channel low-

frequency components (configurable in “

Crossover”).

Large

Select this option for large speakers.

The center speaker will produce all of the center channel frequency

components.

None

Select this option when no center speaker is connected.

The front speakers will produce center channel audio.

NOTE

When configuring the speaker size, as a general guideline, select “Large” if the woofer diameter of your

speaker is 16 cm (6.1/4”) or larger, or “Small

” if it is smaller than 16 cm (6.1/4”).

Setting the use of surround speakers and their size

Selects the setting according to the use and size of your surround speakers.

Setup menu

“Speaker” > “Configuration” > “Surround”

Settings

Small

Select this option for small speakers.

The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround channel low-

frequency components (configurable in “

Crossover”).

Large

Select this option for large speakers.

The surround speakers will produce all of the surround channel frequency

components.

None

Select this option when no surround speakers are connected.

The front speakers will produce surround channel audio. Virtual CINEMA

DSP works in this case.

NOTE

▪ When configuring the speaker size, as a general guideline, select “Large” if the woofer diameter of your

speaker is 16 cm (6.1/4”) or larger, or “Small

” if it is smaller than 16 cm (6.1/4”).

▪ For details on Virtual CINEMA DSP, see the following:

– “Enjoying sound field effects without surround speakers (Virtual CINEMA DSP)” (p.51)

111

Setting the layout of the surround speakers

Selects a surround speaker layout when surround speakers are used.

Setup menu

“Speaker” > “Configuration” > “Surround” > “Layout”

Settings

Rear

Select this option when surround speakers are placed on the rear side of

the room.

Front

Select this option when surround speakers are placed on the front side of

the room. Virtual CINEMA FRONT works in this case.

NOTE

▪ This setting is not available when “Surround” is set to “None”. For details, see the following:

– “Setting the use of surround speakers and their size” (p.111)

▪ For details on Virtual CINEMA FRONT, see the following:

– “Enjoying surround sound with 5 speakers placed in front (Virtual CINEMA FRONT)” (p.51)

Setting the use of surround back speakers and their

size

Selects the setting according to the use and size of your surround back speakers.

Setup menu

“Speaker” > “Configuration” > “Surround Back”

Settings

Small

Select this option for small speakers.

The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround back channel low-

frequency components (configurable in “Crossover”).

Large

Select this option for large speakers.

The surround back speakers will produce all of the surround back channel

frequency components.

None

Select this option when no surround back speakers are connected.

The surround speakers and subwoofer (or front speakers) will produce

surround back channel audio.

NOTE

▪ When configuring the speaker size, as a general guideline, select “Large” if the woofer diameter of your

speaker is 16 cm (6.1/4”) or larger, or “Small

” if it is smaller than 16 cm (6.1/4”).

▪ When using surround back speakers, be sure to connect the surround back left and right speakers. Using

only one surround back speaker was discontinued.

▪ “Surround Back” is not available when “Surround” is set to “None”, or when “Layout (Surround)” is set to

“Front”. For details, see the following:

–

“Setting the use of surround speakers and their size” (p.111)

– “Setting the layout of the surround speakers” (p.112)

112

Setting the use of presence speakers and their size

Selects the setting according to the use and size of your presence speakers.

Setup menu

“Speaker” > “Configuration” > “Front Presence”

Settings

Small

Select this option for small speakers.

The subwoofer or front speakers will produce presence channel low-

frequency components (configurable in “

Crossover”).

Large

Select this option for large speakers.

The presence speakers will produce all of the presence channel

frequency components.

None

Select this option when no presence speakers are connected.

The front speakers will produce presence channel audio.

NOTE

When configuring the speaker size, as a general guideline, select “Large” if the woofer diameter of your

speaker is 16 cm (6.1/4”) or larger, or “Small

” if it is smaller than 16 cm (6.1/4”).

Setting the layout of the presence speakers

Selects a presence layout when presence speakers are used. This setting facilitates

the optimization of the sound field effect.

Setup menu

“Speaker” > “Configuration” > “Front Presence” > “Layout”

Settings

Front Height Select this option when presence speakers are installed on the front wall.

Overhead Select this option when presence speakers are installed to the ceiling.

Dolby Enabled SP

Select this option when using the Dolby Enabled speakers as the

presence speakers.

NOTE

▪ This setting is not available when “Front Presence” is set to “None”. For details on “Front Presence” in the

“Setup” menu, see the following:

– “Setting the use of presence speakers and their size” (p.113)

▪ For details on the layouts of the presence speakers, see the following:

– “Presence speaker layout” (p.183)

Setting the crossover frequency of the low-frequency

components

Sets the lower limit of the low-frequency components that can be output from a

speaker whose size is set to “Small”. A frequency sound lower than the specified value

will be produced from the subwoofer or front speakers.

Setup menu

“

Speaker” > “Configuration” > (speaker) > “Crossover”

Settings

40 Hz, 60 Hz, 80 Hz, 90 Hz, 100 Hz, 110 Hz, 120 Hz, 160 Hz, 200 Hz

NOTE

If the volume and crossover frequency are adjustable on your subwoofer, set the volume to half and

crossover frequency to maximum.

113

Setting the use of a subwoofer

Selects the setting according to the use of your subwoofer.

Setup menu

“Speaker” > “Configuration” > “Subwoofer”

Settings

Use

Select this option when a subwoofer is connected.

The subwoofer will produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio and

low-frequency components from other channels.

None

Select this option when no subwoofer is connected.

The front speakers will produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio

and low-frequency components from other channels.

Setting the phase of the subwoofer

Sets the phase of the subwoofer. When the bass sound is lacking or unclear, switch

the subwoofer phase.

Setup menu

“Speaker” > “Configuration” > “Subwoofer” > “Phase”

Settings

Normal Does not reverse the subwoofer phase.

Reverse Reverses the subwoofer phase.

NOTE

This setting is not available when “Subwoofer” is set to “None”. For details on “Subwoofer” in the “Setup”

menu, see the following:

▪ “Setting the use of a subwoofer” (p.114)

Setting the distance between each speaker and the

listening position

Sets the distance between each speaker and the listening position so that sounds from

the speakers reach the listening position at the same time.

Setup menu

“Speaker” > “Distance”

Choices

Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Surround Back L, Surround Back R,

Presence L

Presence R, Subwoofer

Setting range

0.30 m to 24.00 m (1.0 ft to 80.0 ft), 0.05 m (0.2 ft) increments

NOTE

Select the unit of distance from “Meter” or “Feet” in “Unit”.

Adjusting the volume of each speaker

Adjusts the volume of each speaker to suit your listening position.

Setup menu

“Speaker” > “Level”

Choices

Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Surround Back L, Surround Back R,

Presence L

Presence R, Subwoofer

Setting range

-10.0 dB to +10.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)

NOTE

Test tone output helps you to adjust the speaker balance while confirming its effect. For details, see the

following:

▪ “Outputting test tones” (p.116)

114

Setting the equalizer

Selects the type of equalizer to be used and adjusts the tone.

Setup menu

“Speaker” > “Parametric EQ” > “Parametric EQ”

Settings

Manual Select this option when you want to adjust the equalizer manually.

YPAO:Flat Adjusts individual speakers to achieve the same characteristics.

YPAO:Front

Adjusts individual speakers to achieve the same characteristics as the

front speakers.

YPAO:Natural Adjusts all speakers to achieve a natural sound.

Through Does not use the equalizer.

NOTE

“YPAO:Flat”, “YPAO:Front”, and “YPAO:Natural” are available only when the YPAO measurement results

have already been saved. Press

ENTER again to view the YPAO measurement results. For details on the

YPAO, see the following:

▪

“Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO)” (p.42)

When selecting “Manual”

Set “Parametric EQ” to “Manual” and press ENTER.

Press ENTER again to enter the edit screen.

Use the cursor keys to select a speaker and press ENTER.

NOTE

▪ To restore the default settings for all speakers, select “PEQ Data Clear” and then “OK”.

▪ To copy the parametric equalizer values acquired with the YPAO measurement results to the

“Manual

” fields for fine adjustment, select “PEQ Data Copy

” and then an equalizer type.

Use the cursor keys to select a center frequency from the 7 preset

bands (4 for subwoofer).

To fine-adjust the center frequency, Q factor (bandwidth) or gain,

use the cursor keys to select an item.

Freq.: Use the cursor keys to adjust the center frequency of the selected

band.

Q: Use the cursor keys to adjust the Q factor (bandwidth) of the selected

band.

Gain: Use the cursor keys to adjust the gain of the selected band.

Setting range

Center frequency: 15.6 Hz to 16.0 kHz (15.6 Hz to 250.0 Hz for

subwoofer)

Q factor: 0.500 to 10.080

Gain: -20.0 dB to +6.0 dB

Press SETUP.

This completes the settings.

115

Outputting test tones

Enables/disables the test tone output. Test tone output helps you to adjust the speaker

balance or equalizer while confirming its effect.

Setup menu

“Speaker” > “Test Tone”

Settings

Off Does not output test tones.

Outputs test tones automatically when you adjust the speaker balance or

equalizer.

Reloading the previous YPAO adjustments

When the speaker settings you have configured manually are not suitable, you can

discard the manual settings and reload the previous YPAO adjustments.

Setup menu

“Speaker” > “YPAO Result”

Use the cursor keys to select “Setup Reload” and press ENTER.

Press SETUP.

This completes the settings.

NOTE

You can check the previous YPAO adjustments (“Wiring”, “Size”, “Distance”, and “Level”) in “YPAO Result”.

116

Configuring the sound settings

Checking the current audio signal information

Displays information about the current audio signal.

Setup menu

“Sound” > “Information”

Input

Format Audio format of the input signal

Channel

The number of source channels in the input signal (front/

surround/LFE)

For example, “5.1 (3/2/0.1)” means 5.1ch in total (3 front

channels, 2 surround channels, and LFE).

(When DTS:X content is played back)

For example, “7.1.4” denotes “standard 7.1-channel plus

4 for overhead speaker channels”.

Sampling

The number of samples per second of the input digital

signal

Dialogue

The dialogue normalization level of the input bitstream

signal

Output Channel

The number of signal output channels (for example,

“5.1.2” denotes “standard 5.1-channel plus 2 for overhead

speaker channels”) and the speaker terminals from which

signals are output

NOTE

▪ Even when the unit is set to output bitstream signals directly, the signal may be converted depending on

the specifications and settings of the playback device.

▪ Use the left/right cursor keys to display other informations in the “Setup” menu.

Enabling Lipsync adjustment

Enables/disables the “Lipsync” adjustment configured in “Auto/Manual Select” in the

“Setup” menu.

NOTE

For details on “Auto/Manual Select” in the “Setup” menu, see the following:

▪ “Setting the adjustment method of the Lipsync function” (p.118)

Setup menu

“Sound” > “Lipsync” > “Delay Enable”

Settings

Disable Disables the “Lipsync” adjustment.

Enable Enables the “Lipsync” adjustment.

NOTE

This setting is applied separately to each input source.

117

Setting the adjustment method of the Lipsync

function

Selects the method for adjusting the delay between video and audio output.

Setup menu

“Sound” > “Lipsync” > “Auto/Manual Select”

Settings

Manual

Select this option when you want to adjust the delay between video and

audio output manually.

Adjust the audio output timing in “Adjustment”.

Auto

Adjusts the delay between video and audio output automatically when a

TV that supports an automatic lipsync function is connected to the unit via

HDMI.

If necessary, you can fine-adjust the audio output timing in “Adjustment”.

NOTE

▪ You can enable/disable the Lipsync function by input sources in “Delay Enable” in the “Setup” menu. For

details, see the following:

– “Enabling Lipsync adjustment” (p.117)

▪ For details on “Adjustment” in the “Setup” menu, see the following:

– “Adjusting the delay of the Lipsync function” (p.118)

Adjusting the delay of the Lipsync function

Adjusts the delay between video and audio output manually when “Auto/Manual

Select” is set to “Manual”. You can fine-adjust the audio output timing when “

Auto/

Manual Select” is set to “Auto”.

Setup menu

“Sound” > “Lipsync” > “Adjustment”

Setting range

0 ms to 500 ms (1 ms increments)

NOTE

For details on “Auto/Manual Select” in the “Setup” menu, see the following:

▪ “Setting the adjustment method of the Lipsync function” (p.118)

118

Selecting sound programs

Selects the sound program to change the settings of the sound program.

NOTE

You can select a sound program by pressing PROGRAM.

Setup menu

“Sound” > “DSP Parameter”

MUSIC

Hall in Munich

This program simulates a Munich concert hall with approximately 2,500

seats that uses stylish wood for the interior finishing. Fine, beautiful

reverberations spread richly, creating a calming atmosphere. The

listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the arena.

Hall in Vienna

This program simulates a 1700-seat, middle-sized concert hall with a

shoebox shape that is traditional in Vienna. Pillars and ornate carvings

create extremely complex reverberations from all around the audience,

producing a very full, rich sound.

Chamber

This program creates a relatively wide space with a high ceiling, like an

audience hall in a palace. It offers pleasant reverberations that are

suitable for courtly music and chamber music.

Cellar Club

This program simulates an intimate concert venue with a low ceiling and

homey atmosphere. A realistic, live sound field delivers powerful sounds

that make you feel as if you are sitting in the front row in front of a small

stage.

The Roxy Theatre

This program creates the sound field of a 460-seat rock music concert

venue in Los Angeles. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the

hall.

The Bottom Line

This program creates the sound field at stage front in The Bottom Line, a

famous New York jazz club once. The floor can seat 300 people to the

left and right in a sound field offering real and vibrant sound.

2ch Stereo

Use this program to mix down multichannel sources to 2 channels. When

multichannel signals are input, they are down mixed to 2 channels and

output from the front speakers (this program does not utilize CINEMA

DSP).

7ch Stereo

Use this program to output sound from all speakers. When you play back

multichannel sources, the unit mixes down the source to 2 channels, and

then outputs the sound from all speakers. This program creates a larger

sound field and is ideal for background music at parties.

MOVIE

Sports

This program allows listeners to enjoy the rich vividness of sport

broadcasts and light entertainment programs. In sports broadcasts, the

commentators’ voices are positioned clearly at the center, while the

atmosphere inside the stadium is realistically conveyed by the peripheral

delivery of the sounds of the fans in a suitable space.

Action Game

This program is suitable for action games, such as car racing and

fighting games. The reality of, and emphasis on, various effects makes

the player feel like they are right in the middle of the action, allowing for

greater concentration. Use this program in combination with Compressed

Music Enhancer for a more dynamic and strong sound field.

Roleplaying Game

This program is suitable for role-playing and adventure games. This

program adds depth to the sound field for natural and realistic

reproduction of background music, special effects, and dialogue from a

wide variety of scenes. Use this program in combination with

Compressed Music Enhancer for a clearer and more spatial sound field.

Music Video

This program allows you to enjoy videos of pop, rock, and jazz concerts,

as if you were there yourself. Immerse yourself in the hot concert

atmosphere thanks to the vividness of the singers and solos on stage, a

presence sound field that emphasizes the beat of rhythm instruments,

and a surround sound field that reproduces the space of a big live hall.

Standard

This program creates a sound field that emphasizes the surround feeling

without disturbing the original acoustic positioning of multichannel audio.

Its design is based on the concept of the ideal movie theater, in which

the audience is surrounded by beautiful reverberations from the left,

right, and rear.

Spectacle

This program delivers the scale and grandeur of spectacular movie

productions. It delivers an expansive sound space to match the

cinemascope wide-screen, and boasts a broad dynamic range,

providing everything from small delicate sounds to powerful loud booms.

Sci-Fi

This program clearly reproduces the finely elaborated sound design of

the latest Sci-Fi and SFX movies. You can enjoy a variety of

cinematographically created virtual spaces reproduced with clear

separation between dialogue, sound effects, and background music.

Adventure

This program is ideal for reproducing the sound design of action and

adventure movies precisely. The sound field restrains reverberations, but

puts emphasis on reproducing a sensation of expansiveness on both

sides, powerful space expanded widely to the left and right. The

restrained depth creates a clear and powerful space, while also

maintaining the articulation of the sounds and the separation of the

channels.

Drama

This program features stable reverberations that match a wide range of

movie genres, from serious dramas to musicals and comedies. The

reverberations are modest, but suitably stereophonic. The sound effects

and background music are reproduced with a gentle echo that does not

impinge on the articulation of the dialogue. You’ll never get tired listening

for long periods.

119

Mono Movie

This program reproduces monaural video sources, such as classic

movies, in an atmosphere of a good old movie theater. The program

creates a pleasant space with depth, by adding breadth and the

appropriate reverberation to the original audio.

Adjusting the sound field effect level

Adjusts the sound field effect level. Higher to enhance the sound field effect, and lower

to reduce it.

Setup menu

“Sound” > “DSP Parameter” > (sound program) > “DSP Level”

Setting range

-6 dB to +3 dB

NOTE

▪ Available items vary depending on the selected sound program.

▪ To restore the default settings for the selected sound program, select “Reset”.

Adjusting the delay between the direct sound and

presence sound field generation

Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and presence sound field generation.

Higher to enhance the delay effect, and lower to reduce it.

Setup menu

“Sound” > “DSP Parameter” > (sound program) > “Initial Delay”

Setting range

1 ms to 99 ms

NOTE

▪ Available items vary depending on the selected sound program.

▪ To restore the default settings for the selected sound program, select “Reset”.

Adjusting the broadening effect of the presence

sound field

Adjusts the broadening effect of the presence sound field.

Setup menu

“Sound” > “DSP Parameter” > (sound program) > “Room Size”

Setting range

0.1 to 2.0 (higher to enhance the broadening effect)

NOTE

▪ Available items vary depending on the selected sound program.

▪ To restore the default settings for the selected sound program, select “Reset”.

120

Adjusting the loss of the presence sound field

Adjusts the loss of the presence sound field.

Setup menu

“Sound” > “DSP Parameter” > (sound program) > “Liveness”

Setting range

0 to 10 (higher to enhance the reflectivity)

NOTE

▪ Available items vary depending on the selected sound program.

▪ To restore the default settings for the selected sound program, select “Reset”.

Adjusting the decay time of the rear reverberant

sound

Adjusts the decay time of the rear reverberant sound. Higher to enrich the reverberant

sound and lower to have clear sound.

Setup menu

“Sound” > “DSP Parameter” > (sound program) > “Reverb Time”

Setting range

1.0 s to 5.0 s

NOTE

▪ Available items vary depending on the selected sound program.

▪ To restore the default settings for the selected sound program, select “Reset”.

Adjusting the delay between the direct sound and

reverberant sound generation

Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and reverberant sound generation. Higher

to enhance the delay effect, and lower to reduce it.

Setup menu

“Sound” > “DSP Parameter” > (sound program) > “Reverb Delay”

Setting range

0 ms to 250 ms

NOTE

▪ Available items vary depending on the selected sound program.

▪ To restore the default settings for the selected sound program, select “Reset”.

Adjusting the volume of the reverberant sound

Adjusts the volume of the reverberant sound. Higher to strengthen the reverberant

sound, and lower to weaken it.

Setup menu

“Sound” > “DSP Parameter” > (sound program) > “Reverb Level”

Setting range

0 % to 100 %

NOTE

▪ Available items vary depending on the selected sound program.

▪ To restore the default settings for the selected sound program, select “Reset”.

121

Adjusting the delay between the direct sound and

surround sound field generation

Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and surround sound field generation.

Higher to enhance the delay effect, and lower to reduce it.

Setup menu

“Sound” > “DSP Parameter” > (sound program) > “Surround Initial Delay”

Setting range

1 ms to 49 ms

NOTE

▪ Available items vary depending on the selected sound program.

▪ To restore the default settings for the selected sound program, select “Reset”.

Adjusting the broadening effect of the surround

sound field

Adjusts the broadening effect of the surround sound field.

Setup menu

“Sound” > “DSP Parameter” > (sound program) > “Surround Room Size”

Setting range

0.1 to 2.0 (higher to enhance the broadening effect)

NOTE

▪ Available items vary depending on the selected sound program.

▪ To restore the default settings for the selected sound program, select “Reset”.

Adjusting the loss of the surround sound field

Adjusts the loss of the surround sound field.

Setup menu

“Sound” > “DSP Parameter” > (sound program) > “Surround Liveness”

Setting range

0 to 10 (higher to enhance the reflectivity)

NOTE

▪ Available items vary depending on the selected sound program.

▪ To restore the default settings for the selected sound program, select “Reset”.

Adjusting the delay between the direct sound and

surround back sound field generation

Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and surround back sound field generation.

Higher to enhance the delay effect, and lower to reduce it.

Setup menu

“Sound” > “DSP Parameter” > (sound program) > “Surround Back Initial Delay”

Setting range

1 ms to 49 ms

NOTE

▪ Available items vary depending on the selected sound program.

▪ To restore the default settings for the selected sound program, select “Reset”.

122

Adjusting the broadening effect of the surround

back sound field

Adjusts the broadening effect of the surround back sound field.

Setup menu

“Sound” > “DSP Parameter” > (sound program) > “Surround Back Room Size”

Setting range

0.1 to 2.0 (higher to enhance the broadening effect)

NOTE

▪ Available items vary depending on the selected sound program.

▪ To restore the default settings for the selected sound program, select “Reset”.

Adjusting the loss of the surround back sound field

Adjusts the loss of the surround back sound field.

Setup menu

“Sound” > “DSP Parameter” > (sound program) > “Surround Back Liveness”

Setting range

0 to 10 (higher to enhance the reflectivity)

NOTE

▪ Available items vary depending on the selected sound program.

▪ To restore the default settings for the selected sound program, select “Reset”.

Selecting the surround decoder used in the program

Selects a surround decoder to be used.

Setup menu

“Sound” > “Surround Decoder” > “Decode Type”

Settings

Auto

Uses the decoder automatically selected by input source. The DTS

Neural:X decoder is selected for DTS sources and the Dolby Surround

decoder is selected for other sources.

bDsur

Dolby Surround decoder. Expands the sound using a method optimized

for the layout of the installed speakers. It produces the extended

surround sound optimized for your speaker system. A real acoustic

space (including overhead) will be created especially when object-

based audio (such as Dolby Atmos content) is played.

Neural:X

DTS Neural:X decoder. Expands the sound using a method optimized

for the layout of the installed speakers. It produces the extended

surround sound optimized for your speaker system. A real acoustic

space (including overhead) will be created especially when object-

based audio (such as DTS:X content) is played.

Neo:6 Cinema

Uses the DTS Neo:6 decoder (or DTS-ES Matrix decoder) suitable for

movies. Sounds will be output from the surround/surround back

speakers.

Neo:6 Music

Uses the DTS Neo:6 decoder (or DTS-ES Matrix decoder) suitable for

music. Sounds will be output from the surround/surround back

speakers.

NOTE

▪ For details on each decoder, see the following:

– “Glossary of audio decoding format” (p.185)

▪ You can adjust the surround decoder parameters in “Surround Decoder” in the “Setup” menu. For details,

see the following:

– “Adjusting the center localization (broadening effect) of the front sound field” (p.124)

– “Setting the use of Center Spread” (p.124)

▪ The selected surround decoder may not work for some input sources.

▪ We recommend Dolby Surround while network streaming is Dolby contents.

▪ The Neural:X decoder does not work for Dolby Digital Plus or Dolby TrueHD signals. Select “Auto” or

“bDsur” for these signals.

▪ When the Dolby Surround decoder or the Neural:X decoder is selected, virtual surround processing (such

as Virtual CINEMA FRONT) does not work. For details, see the following:

– “Enjoying sound field effects without surround speakers (Virtual CINEMA DSP)” (p.51)

– “Enjoying surround sound with 5 speakers placed in front (Virtual CINEMA FRONT)” (p.51)

123

Setting the use of Center Spread

Selects whether to spread the center channel signals to left and right when a 2-

channel source is played. This setting is effective when “bDsur” is selected.

Setup menu

“

Sound” > “Surround Decoder” > “Center Spread”

Settings

Off Disables Center Spread.

On Enables Center Spread.

NOTE

▪ If you feel the center sound is too strong, set this function to “On”.

▪ For details on the surround decoder, see the following:

– “Selecting the surround decoder used in the program” (p.123)

Adjusting the center localization (broadening effect)

of the front sound field

Adjusts the center localization (broadening effect) of the front sound field. Adjust this

higher to strengthen the center localization (less broadening effect) or lower to weaken

it (more broadening effect). This setting is effective when “Neo:6 Music

” is selected.

Setup menu

“Sound” > “Surround Decoder” > “Center Image”

Setting range

0.0 to 1.0

NOTE

For details on the surround decoder, see the following:

▪ “Selecting the surround decoder used in the program” (p.123)

Adjusting the entire volume for “7ch Stereo”

Adjusts the entire volume. This setting is effective when “7ch Stereo” is selected.

Setup menu

“Sound” > “7ch Stereo” > “Level”

Setting range

-5 to +5

Adjusting the front and rear volume balance for “7ch

Stereo”

Adjusts the front and rear volume balance. Higher to enhance the front side, and lower

to enhance the rear side. This setting is effective when “7ch Stereo” is selected.

Setup menu

“Sound” > “7ch Stereo” > “Front / Rear Balance”

Setting range

-5 to +5

Adjusting the left and right volume balance for “7ch

Stereo”

Adjusts the left and right volume balance. Higher to enhance the right side, and lower

to enhance the left side. This setting is effective when “7ch Stereo

” is selected.

Setup menu

“Sound” > “7ch Stereo” > “Left / Right Balance”

Setting range

-5 to +5

124

Adjusting the height volume balance using the

presence speakers for “7ch Stereo”

Adjusts the height volume balance using the presence speakers. Higher to enhance

the upside, and lower to enhance the downside. This setting is effective when “7ch

Stereo” is selected.

Setup menu

“

Sound” > “7ch Stereo” > “Height Balance”

Setting range

0 to 10

NOTE

The presence speakers do not produce sounds when “Height Balance” is set to “0”.

Setting the use of Monaural Mix for “7ch Stereo”

Enables/disables monaural sound output. This setting is effective when “7ch Stereo” is

selected.

Setup menu

“Sound” > “7ch Stereo” > “Monaural Mix”

Settings

Off Disables monaural sound output.

On Enables monaural sound output.

Setting the dynamic range adjustment method

Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for bitstream audio (Dolby Digital and

DTS signals) playback.

Setup menu

“Sound” > “Dynamic Range”

Settings

Maximum Produces audio without adjusting the dynamic range.

Standard Optimizes the dynamic range for regular home use.

Minimum/Auto

Sets the dynamic range for clear sound even at night or at low volumes.

When playing back Dolby TrueHD signals, the dynamic range is

automatically adjusted based on the input signal information.

Setting the limit value of the volume

Sets the limit value of the volume adjusted by using such as VOLUME keys on the

remote control.

Setup menu

“Sound” > “Volume” > “Max Volume”

Setting range

-60.0 dB to +15.0 dB (5.0 dB increments), +16.5 dB [20.5 to 95.5 (5.0 increments),

97.0]

NOTE

For details on the scale of the volume display (dB unit or numeric value), see the following:

▪ “Setting the scale of the volume display” (p.147)

125

Setting the initial volume for when the unit is turned

Sets the initial volume when the unit is turned on.

Setup menu

“Sound” > “Volume” > “Initial Volume”

Settings

Off

Sets the level to the volume level of the unit when it last

entered standby mode.

Mute Sets the unit to mute the audio output.

-80.0 dB to +16.5 dB

(0.5 dB increments)

[0.5 to 97.0 (0.5

increments)]

Sets the level to the specified volume level.

NOTE

▪ This setting works only when the volume level is set lower than “Max Volume”. For details on “Max

Volume” in the “Setup” menu, see the following:

–

“Setting the limit value of the volume” (p.125)

▪ For details on the scale of the volume display (dB unit or numeric value), see the following:

– “Setting the scale of the volume display” (p.147)

Adjusting the CINEMA DSP 3D effect level

automatically

Selects whether to automatically adjust the CINEMA DSP 3D effect level when the

volume is adjusted.

Setup menu

“Sound” > “Adaptive DSP Level”

Settings

Off Does not adjust the effect level automatically.

On Adjusts the effect level automatically.

Setting Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS)

Selects whether to create Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) using the surround

speakers.

When VSBS is enabled, the unit creates VSBS when no surround back speakers are

connected.

Setup menu

“Sound” > “Virtual Speaker” > “VSBS”

Settings

Off Disables Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS).

On Enables Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS).

NOTE

▪ VSBS is effective only when 6.1/7.1-channel content is played back.

▪ VSBS, that is working with CINEMA DSP 3D, is not available when the straight decode mode or the direct

playback mode is enabled.

126

Configuring the scene settings

Selecting items to be included as the scene

assignments

Selects items to be included as the scene assignments. You can also view the settings

currently assigned to the selected scene.

NOTE

The scene assignments can include radio stations, or the content on a selected USB storage device,

Bluetooth device, and network device.

Setup menu

“Scene” > “Scene Setting”

Use the cursor keys to select the SCENE name and press ENTER.

To include items as the scene assignments, use the cursor keys

to select an item and press ENTER to check the box (or uncheck

the box to exclude).

Check or uncheck

Choices

HDMI Control Control Sync (HDMI Control (p.130))

Input Input (p.61)

Registered Content

[Input sources: TUNER, (network sources), SERVER, NET RADIO,

Bluetooth, USB]

Station, Music Content

[Input sources: others]

---

HDMI Output

HDMI Output (p.62)

Mode DSP Program (p.50), Enhancer (p.98)

Sound

Tone Control (p.96), YPAO Volume (p.96), Adaptive DRC (p.97), Extra

Bass (p.99)

Surround Dialogue Lift (p.98), Dialogue Level (p.97), Subwoofer Trim (p.99)

Video Video Mode (p.129)

Volume Master Volume (p.61)

Lipsync Lipsync (p.118)

Speaker Setup PEQ Select (p.115)

Zone Interlock Power (p.59), Input (p.59), Volume (p.138)

NOTE

To restore the default settings for the selected scene, select “Reset” and press ENTER.

127

Renaming the SCENE name

Changes the SCENE name displayed on the front display or on the TV.

Setup menu

“Scene” > “Scene Rename”

Use the cursor keys to select the SCENE name and press ENTER

to enter the name edit screen.

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename.

NOTE

▪ To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.

▪ To restore the default name, select “RESET”.

Use the cursor keys to select “SAVE” and press ENTER.

Press SETUP.

This completes the settings.

128

Configuring the video/HDMI settings

Checking the current video and HDMI signal

information

Displays information about the current video signal and the TVs connected to the

HDMI OUT jacks.

Setup menu

“Video/HDMI” > “Information”

HDMI Signal Presence or absence of HDMI signal input/output

HDMI Resolution Resolutions of input signal (analog or HDMI) and output signal (HDMI)

Video Resolution Resolutions supported by the TV

NOTE

Use the left/right cursor keys to display other informations in the “Setup” menu.

Setting the use of the video signal processing

Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution and aspect ratio).

Setup menu

“Video/HDMI” > “Video Mode” > “Video Mode”

Settings

Direct Disables the video signal processing.

Processing

Enables the video signal processing.

Configure the settings in “Resolution” and “Aspect”.

NOTE

▪ When “Video Mode” is set to “Direct”, the unit transmits video signals with the least circuitry in order to

reduce video output delay.

▪ When “Video Mode” is set to “Processing” and the resolution is being converted, short messages are not

displayed on the TV screen.

Setting a resolution to output HDMI video signals

Selects a resolution to output HDMI video signals when “Video Mode” is set to

“Processing”.

NOTE

For details on “Video Mode” in the “Setup” menu, see the following:

▪ “Setting the use of the video signal processing” (p.129)

Setup menu

“Video/HDMI” > “Video Mode” > “Resolution”

Settings

Through Does not convert the resolution.

Auto Selects a resolution automatically in accordance with TV resolution.

480p/576p, 720p,

1080i, 1080p, 4K

Output video signals with a selected resolution.

(Only the resolutions supported by your TV are selectable.)

NOTE

If you need to select a resolution that is not supported by your TV, set “MON.CHK” in the “ADVANCED

SETUP” menu to “SKIP” and try again. (Note that the output video may not be displayed on your TV

normally.) For details, see the following:

▪

“Removing the limitation on HDMI video output (MON.CHK)” (p.153)

129

Setting an aspect ratio to output HDMI video signals

Selects an aspect ratio to output HDMI video signals when “Video Mode” is set to

“Processing”.

NOTE

For details on “Video Mode” in the “Setup” menu, see the following:

▪ “Setting the use of the video signal processing” (p.129)

Setup menu

“Video/HDMI” > “Video Mode” > “Aspect”

Settings

Through Does not convert the aspect ratio.

16:9 Normal

Outputs 4:3 video signals to a 16:9 TV with black bands on either side of

the screen.

NOTE

This setting functions only when 480i/576i or 480p/576p signals are converted into 720p, 1080i, 1080p, or

2160p (4K) signals.

Setting the use of HDMI Control

Enables/disables HDMI Control. HDMI Control allows you to operate external devices

via HDMI.

Setup menu

“Video/HDMI” > “HDMI Control” > “HDMI Control”

Settings

Off Disables HDMI Control.

Enables HDMI Control.

Configure the settings in “TV Audio Input”, “ARC” and “Standby Sync”.

NOTE

To use HDMI control, you need to perform the HDMI Control link setup after connecting HDMI Control-

compatible devices. For details, see the following:

▪ “HDMI Control and synchronized operations” (p.191)

Setting the audio jack used for TV audio input

Selects an audio input jack of the unit to be used for TV audio input when “HDMI

Control” is set to “

On”. The unit’s input source automatically switches to TV audio when

the TV input is switched to its built-in tuner.

NOTE

For details on “HDMI Control” in the “Setup” menu, see the following:

▪ “Setting the use of HDMI Control” (p.130)

Setup menu

“Video/HDMI” > “HDMI Control” > “TV Audio Input”

Settings

AV 1–2, AUDIO 1–5

NOTE

When using ARC to input TV audio to the unit, the input jacks selected here will be used for TV Audio Input.

Setting the use of ARC

Select whether to output TV audio to the speakers connected to the unit when “HDMI

Control” is set to “

On”.

NOTE

For details on “HDMI Control” in the “Setup” menu, see the following:

▪ “Setting the use of HDMI Control” (p.130)

Setup menu

“Video/HDMI” > “HDMI Control” > “ARC”

Settings

Off Disables ARC.

On Enables ARC.

NOTE

You do not need to change this setting normally. In case noises are produced from the speakers connected

to the unit because TV audio signals input to the unit via ARC are not supported by the unit, set “ARC” to “Off”

and use the TV’s speakers.

130

Linking the standby modes of the unit and the TV

Select whether to use HDMI control to link the unit's standby mode to the TV's power

when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”.

NOTE

For details on “HDMI Control” in the “Setup” menu, see the following:

▪ “Setting the use of HDMI Control” (p.130)

Setup menu

“Video/HDMI” > “HDMI Control” > “Standby Sync”

Settings

Off Does not set the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off.

On Sets the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off.

Auto

Sets the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off only when the unit

is receiving TV audio or HDMI signals.

Setting the output of HDMI audio from the TV

speaker

Enables/disables audio output from a TV connected to the HDMI OUT jack.

NOTE

▪ The “HDMI OUT1” setting is available only when “HDMI Control” is set to “Off”.

▪ For details on “HDMI Control” in the “Setup” menu, see the following:

– “Setting the use of HDMI Control” (p.130)

Setup menu

“Video/HDMI” > “HDMI Audio Output” > “HDMI OUT1”/“HDMI OUT2”

Settings

Off Disables audio output from the TV.

On Enables audio output from the TV.

Setting the version of HDCP used on the HDMI input

jacks

Selects the HDCP version of the HDMI input jacks for watching 4K video content.

Setup menu

“Video/HDMI” > “HDCP Version”

Input sources

HDMI 1–7

Settings

Auto Automatically sets the version of HDCP according to content.

1.4 Sets the version of HDCP to always be 1.4.

Setting the use of HDMI Standby Through

Select whether to output video/audio (input through HDMI jacks) to the TV when the

unit is in standby mode.

NOTE

If this function is set to “On” or “Auto”, you can use the input selection keys (HDMI 1–7) to select an HDMI

input even when the unit is in standby mode (the standby indicator on the unit blinks).

Setup menu

“Video/HDMI” > “HDMI Standby Through”

Settings

Off Does not output video/audio to the TV.

Auto

Automatically selects whether to output video/audio depending on the

status of the connected device.

Outputs video/audio to the TV.

(The unit consumes more power than when “

Off

” or “Auto” is selected.)

NOTE

▪ “Off” is not selectable when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”.

▪ For details on “HDMI Control” in the “Setup” menu, see the following:

– “Setting the use of HDMI Control” (p.130)

131

Configuring the network settings

Checking the network information on the unit

Displays the network information on the unit.

Setup menu

“Network” > “Information”

IP Address IP address

Subnet Mask Subnet mask

Default Gateway The IP address of the default gateway

DNS Server (P) The IP address of the primary DNS server

DNS Server (S) The IP address of the secondary DNS server

MAC Address (Ethernet)

MAC address

MAC Address (Wi-Fi)

Network Name Network name (the unit’s name on the network)

MusicCast Network The status of the MusicCast network connection.

Wired/Wireless The status of the wired or wireless connection

SSID

(When using wireless [Wi-Fi] network connection)

The SSID of the wireless network

NOTE

Use the left/right cursor keys to display other informations in the “Setup” menu.

Setting the network connection method (Wired/

Wireless)

Selects the network connection method.

Setup menu

“Network” > “Network Connection”

Choices

Wired

Select this option when you want to connect the unit to a network with

a commercially-available network cable.

Wireless(Wi-Fi)

Select this option when you want to connect the unit to a network via

the wireless router (access point).

NOTE

For details on the network connection, see the following:

▪ “Preparing for connecting to a network” (p.36)

Setting the network parameters automatically

(DHCP)

Set the network parameters (such as IP address, Subnet Mask, and Default Gateway)

automatically using a DHCP server.

Setup menu

“Network” > “IP Address” > “DHCP”

Settings

Off Does not use a DHCP server. Configure the network parameters manually.

Uses a DHCP server to automatically obtain the unit’s network parameters

(such as IP address).

132

Setting the network parameters manually

Set the network parameters (such as IP address, Subnet Mask, and Default Gateway)

manually.

Setup menu

“Network” > “IP Address”

Set “DHCP” to “Off”.

Use the cursor keys to select “IP Address” and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys to select a parameter type and press ENTER.

IP Address Specifies an IP address.

Subnet Mask Specifies a subnet mask.

Default Gateway Specifies the IP address of the default gateway.

DNS Server (P) Specifies the IP address of the primary DNS server.

DNS Server (S) Specifies the IP address of the secondary DNS server.

Use the cursor keys to move the edit position and to select a

value.

To confirm the setting, press ENTER.

To set another parameter, repeat steps 3 to 5.

Press SETUP.

This completes the settings.

Setting the use of the Network Standby function

Selects whether the unit can be turned on from other network devices (network

standby).

Setup menu

“Network” > “Network Standby”

Settings

Off Disables the network standby function.

Enables the network standby function.

(The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.)

Auto

Enables the network standby function.

(If “Network Connection” is set to “Wired”, the unit is set to the power

saving mode when the network cable is disconnected.)

NOTE

If you set “Network Standby” to “Off”, “Bluetooth Standby” will be disabled.

With an advanced energy saving design, this product achieves a low power

consumption of not more than two watts when in Network Standby mode.

133

Setting the MAC address filter

Sets the MAC address filter to limit access to the unit from other network devices.

NOTE

▪ Operation of the AirPlay function or the DMC is not limited by this setting.

▪ You can specify up to 10 network devices that are permitted to access the unit. For details, see the

following:

– “Setting the MAC address” (p.134)

Setup menu

“Network” > “MAC Address Filter” > “Filter”

Settings

Off Disables the MAC address filter.

Enables the MAC address filter. Specify the MAC addresses of the

network devices that will be permitted access to the unit.

Setting the MAC address

Sets the MAC address of the network device that is permitted to access the unit. You

can specify up to 10 network devices.

Setup menu

“Network” > “MAC Address Filter” > “MAC Address”

Use the cursor keys to select an MAC address number and press

ENTER.

Use the cursor keys to move the edit position and to select a

value.

To confirm the setting, press ENTER.

To specify another MAC address, repeat steps 1 to 3.

Press SETUP.

This completes the settings.

Setting the use of a Digital Media Controller

Selects whether to allow a Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control playback. A Digital

Media Controller (DMC) is a device that can control other network devices through the

network. When this function is enabled, you can control playback of the unit from

DMCs (such as Windows Media Player 12) on the same network.

Setup menu

“Network” > “DMC Control”

Settings

Disable Does not allow DMCs to control playback.

Enable Allows DMCs to control playback.

Setting the use of volume control via AirPlay

Enables/disables volume control from iTunes/iPhone via AirPlay. When other than “Off”

is set, you can adjust the unit’s volume from the iTunes/iPhone during playback.

Setup menu

“Network” > “AirPlay Volume Interlock”

Settings

Off Disables volume control from iTunes/iPhone.

Limited

Enables volume control from iTunes/iPhone within the limited range

(-80 dB to -20 dB and mute).

Full

Enables volume control from iTunes/iPhone in the full range

(-80 dB to +16.5 dB and mute).

134

Setting the network name of the unit

Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on other network

devices.

Setup menu

“Network” > “Network Name”

Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to edit the name.

NOTE

▪ To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.

▪ To restore the default name, select “RESET”.

Use the cursor keys to select “SAVE” and press ENTER.

Press SETUP.

This completes the settings.

Setting the power interlock from the unit to

MusicCast compatible devices

Selects whether turning on the power of the master device of the MusicCast network

(this unit) also turns on the power of other devices of the network.

Setup menu

“Network” > “MusicCast Link Power Interlock”

Settings

Off Disables the power interlock from the unit (MusicCast master).

On Enables the power interlock from the unit (MusicCast master).

135

Configuring the Bluetooth® settings

Setting the use of Bluetooth®

Enables/disables the Bluetooth function.

Setup menu

“Bluetooth” > “Bluetooth”

Settings

Off Disables the Bluetooth function.

On Enables the Bluetooth function.

Terminating the connection between a Bluetooth®

device and the unit

Terminates the Bluetooth connection between a Bluetooth device (such as a

smartphone) and the unit.

Setup menu

“Bluetooth” > “Audio Receive” > “Disconnect”

Select “Disconnect” and press ENTER to terminate the Bluetooth connection.

NOTE

This setting is not available when no Bluetooth devices are connected.

Setting the use of the Bluetooth® Standby function

Selects whether to enable/disable the function that turns on the unit from Bluetooth

devices (Bluetooth standby). If this function is set to “On”, the unit automatically turns

on when a connect operation is performed on the Bluetooth device.

Setup menu

“Bluetooth” > “Audio Receive” > “Bluetooth Standby”

Settings

Off Disables the Bluetooth standby function.

Enables the Bluetooth standby function.

(The unit consumes more power than when “

Off” is selected.)

NOTE

This setting is not available when “Network Standby” is set to “Off”. For details, see the following:

▪ “Setting the use of the Network Standby function” (p.133)

136

Setting the use of audio transmission to a Bluetooth®

device

Enables/disables the Bluetooth audio transmitter function.

When this function is enabled, you can enjoy audio played back on the unit using

Bluetooth speakers/headphones.

Setup menu

“Bluetooth” > “Audio Send” > “Transmitter”

Settings

Off Disables the Bluetooth audio transmitter function.

On Enables the Bluetooth audio transmitter function.

NOTE

For details on connecting Bluetooth devices to which audio is transmitted (speakers, headphones, etc.), see

the following:

▪ “Connecting the unit to a Bluetooth

device that receives transmitted audio”

(p.137)

Connecting the unit to a Bluetooth® device that

receives transmitted audio

Establishes a connection between the unit and Bluetooth devices that receive audio

transmitted from the unit, such as speakers and headphones, when "Transmitter" is set

to "On" in the "

Setup" menu.

NOTE

For details on “Transmitter” in the “Setup” menu, see the following:

▪ “Setting the use of audio transmission to a Bluetooth

device” (p.137)

Setup menu

“Bluetooth” > “Audio Send” > “Device Search”

Press ENTER.

A list of Bluetooth devices that can connect to the unit is displayed.

Use the cursor keys to display the desired Bluetooth speakers/

headphones and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to check the Bluetooth speakers/

headphones to be connected with the unit.

Use the cursor keys to select “CONNECT” and press ENTER.

When the connection process finishes, “Completed” is displayed.

Press ENTER.

This completes the settings.

NOTE

▪ If the desired Bluetooth device is not displayed on the list, set the Bluetooth device to pairing mode and

then perform “Device Search” operation again.

▪ To terminate the Bluetooth connection, perform a disconnect operation on the Bluetooth speakers/

headphones.

137

Configuring the multi zone settings

Checking the Zone2 information

Displays information about Zone2.

Setup menu

“Multi Zone” > “Information”

On/Off The power on/off for Zone2

Input The input source selected for Zone2

Volume The volume setting for Zone2

Tone Control The tone control setting (the level of Treble and Bass) for Zone2

NOTE

Use the left/right cursor keys to display other informations in the “Setup” menu.

Setting the use of volume adjustments for Zone2

output

Enables/disables volume adjustments for Zone2 output.

If you have connected an external amplifier with volume control to the unit, disable

volume adjustments for Zone2.

Setup menu

“Multi Zone” > “Zone2” > “Volume”

Settings

Fixed Disables volume adjustments for Zone2 output.

Variable Enables volume adjustments for Zone2 output.

NOTE

“Volume” is automatically set to “Variable” when “Power Amp Assign” is set to “7.1 +1Zone” or “5.1.2

+1Zone”. For details on “

Power Amp Assign” in the “

Setup” menu, see the following:

▪ “Setting your speaker system” (p.110)

Setting the Zone2 limit value of the volume

Sets the Zone2 limit value of the volumes.

Setup menu

“Multi Zone” > “Zone2” > “Max Volume”

Setting range

-60.0 dB to +10.0 dB (5.0 dB increments) [20.5 to 90.5 (5.0 increments)]

NOTE

▪ This setting is not available when “Volume” is set to “Fixed”. For details, see the following:

– “Setting the use of volume adjustments for Zone2 output” (p.138)

▪ For details on the scale of the volume display (dB unit or numeric value), see the following:

– “Setting the scale of the volume display” (p.147)

138

Setting the Zone2 initial volume for when the unit is

turned on

Sets the Zone2 initial volume for when the unit is turned on.

Setup menu

“Multi Zone” > “Zone2” > “Initial Volume”

Settings

Off

Sets the level at the volume level of the unit when it last

entered standby mode.

Mute Sets the unit to mute the audio output.

-80.0 dB to +10.0 dB

(0.5 dB increments)

[0.5 to 90.5 (0.5

increments)]

Sets the level to the specified volume level.

NOTE

▪ This setting is not available when “Volume” is set to “Fixed”. For details, see the following:

– “Setting the use of volume adjustments for Zone2 output” (p.138)

▪ This setting works only when the volume level is set lower than “Max Volume” in “Zone2”. For details, see

the following:

– “Setting the Zone2 limit value of the volume” (p.138)

▪ For details on the scale of the volume display (dB unit or numeric value), see the following:

– “Setting the scale of the volume display” (p.147)

Adjusting the time deviation in relation to the main

zone

Adjusts the time deviation in relation to the main zone.

Setup menu

“Multi Zone” > “Zone2” > “Audio Delay”

Setting range

0 ms to 100 ms (1 ms increments)

Switching between stereo and monaural for Zone2

output

Switches between stereo and monaural for Zone2 output.

Setup menu

“Multi Zone” > “Zone2” > “Monaural”

Settings

Off Produces stereo sounds in Zone2.

On Produces monaural sounds in Zone2.

139

Setting the use of Compressed Music Enhancer for

Zone2 output

Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer for Zone2 output.

Setup menu

“Multi Zone” > “Zone2” > “Enhancer”

Settings

Off Disables Compressed Music Enhancer.

On Enables Compressed Music Enhancer.

Adjusting the tone for Zone2 output

Adjusts the level of high-frequency range (Treble) and low-frequency range (Bass) for

Zone2 output.

Setup menu

“Multi Zone” > “Zone2” > “Tone Control”

Choices

Treble, Bass

Settings

Auto

Adjusts the levels of the high-frequency range (Treble) and low-frequency

range (Bass) automatically in synchronization with the main volume, with

correction for the auditory response of the human ear.

Manual

Adjusts the level of high-frequency range (Treble) and low-frequency

range (Bass) manually (-6.0 to +6.0 dB, 0.5 dB increments).

Bypass

Does not adjust the level of high-frequency range (Treble) and low-

frequency range (Bass).

Setting the use of Extra Bass for Zone2 output

Enables/disables Extra Bass for Zone2 output. When Extra Bass is enabled, you can

enjoy enhanced bass sounds, regardless of the size of speakers.

Setup menu

“Multi Zone” > “Zone2” > “Extra Bass”

Settings

Off Disables Extra Bass.

On Enables Extra Bass.

Adjusting the volume balance for Zone2 output

Adjusts the volume balance for Zone2 output. Higher to enhance the right side, and

lower to enhance the left side.

Setup menu

“Multi Zone” > “Zone2” > “Left / Right Balance”

Setting range

-20 to +20

140

Renaming the zone name

Changes the zone name displayed on the TV screen.

Setup menu

“Multi Zone” > “Zone Rename”

Use the cursor keys to select a zone name to be renamed and

press ENTER.

The cursor moves to the name edit screen.

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename.

NOTE

▪ To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.

▪ To restore the default name, select “RESET”.

Use the cursor keys to select “SAVE” and press ENTER.

Press SETUP.

This completes the settings.

Setting the use of switching to the party mode on

Zone2

Enables/disables switching to the party mode.

Setup menu

“Multi Zone” > “Party Mode Set” > “Target : Zone2”

Settings

Disable Disables switching to the party mode.

Enable

Enables switching to the party mode. You can turn on/off the party mode

by pressing PARTY on the remote control.

NOTE

For details on party mode, see the following:

▪ “Enjoying the same source in multiple rooms (party mode)” (p.60)

141

Configuring the system settings

Checking the system information on the unit

Displays the system information on the unit.

Setup menu

“System” > “Information”

Remote ID The unit’s remote control ID setting

TV Format The unit’s video signal type

Speaker Impedance The speaker impedance setting of the unit

Tuner Frequency Step

(Asia and General models only)

The FM/AM tuning frequency setting of the unit

System ID System ID number

Firmware Version The version of firmware installed on the unit

NOTE

Use the left/right cursor keys to display other informations in the “Setup” menu.

Setting the on-screen menu language

Select the on-screen menu language.

Setup menu

“System” > “Language”

Settings

English English

日本語 Japanese

Français French

Deutsch German

Español Spanish

Русский Russian

Italiano Italian

中文 Chinese

NOTE

The information on the front display is provided in English only.

142

Combining audio of another input source with video

of the current input source

Select the audio of a different input source to play back together with the video of the

currently selected input source. For example, use this function in the following cases.

• Connecting a playback device that supports HDMI video output, but not HDMI

audio output

Setup menu

“System” > “Audio In”

Input sources

HDMI 1-7, AV 1-2

Settings

AV 1-2, AUDIO 1-5

Video/audio input jacks available on the unit

Output jacks on video device Input jacks on the unit

Video Audio Video Audio

HDMI

Digital optical

HDMI 1-7

AUDIO 1 (OPTICAL)

AUDIO 2 (OPTICAL)

Digital coaxial

AV 1 (COAXIAL)

AUDIO 3 (COAXIAL)

Analog stereo

AV 2 (AUDIO)

AUDIO 4-5

Component video

Digital optical

AV1

(COMPONENT VIDEO)

AUDIO 1 (OPTICAL)

AUDIO 2 (OPTICAL)

Analog stereo

AV 2 (AUDIO)

AUDIO 4-5 (AUDIO)

Composite video

Digital optical

AV2

(COMPOSITE VIDEO)

AUDIO 1 (OPTICAL)

AUDIO 2 (OPTICAL)

Digital coaxial

AV 1 (COAXIAL)

AUDIO 3 (COAXIAL)

Necessary setting

For example, if you have connected a video device to AV 1 (COMPONENT VIDEO)

and AV 2 (AUDIO) jack of the unit, change the combination setting as follows.

ANTENNA

AUDIO 4

AUDIO 5

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

COMPONENT VIDEO

COAXIAL

AUDIO 1

AUDIO 2

AUDIO 3

AV 1 AV 2

ARC

VIDEO

ZONE OU

CENTER

ZONE 2

TRIGGER OUT

REMOTE

12V

OUT

0.1A

HDMI

OUT

PHONO

GND

HDCP2.2

( )

(1 MOVIE) (5 ST

( 7 TV )

( 3 MUSIC )

( 2 RADIO )

AUDIO

COMPONENT

VIDEO

The unit (rear)

AUDIO 4-5 (AUDIO) jacks

AV 1 (COMPONENT

VIDEO) jacks

Video output

(component video)

Audio output

(analog stereo)

Set-top box

143

Press INPUT to select “AV 1” (video input jack to be used) as the

input source.

Press SETUP.

PRES ET

BAND TUNINGTUNING

MEMORY

RED GREEN

YELLOW

BLUE

POP-UP

/MENU

HOME

TOP

VOLUME

BLUETOOTH

NET USBTUNER

INPUT

PROGR AM

SUR. DECODE

BASS

ENHANCER

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

SCENE

4321

8765

HDMI OUT

PARTY

SLEEP

MAIN

ZONE 2

PRES ET

BAND

TUNING

MEMORY

RED

GREEN

YELLOW

BLUE

POP-UP

/MENU

HOME

TOP

VOLUME

BLUETOOTH

NET

USB

TUNER

INPUT

PROGR AM

SUR. DECODE

BASS

ENHANCER

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

SCENE

HDMI OUT

PARTY

SLEEP

MAIN

ZONE 2

PRES ET

BANDBAND TUNINGTUNING TUNINGTUNING

MEMORYMEMORY

RED GREEN

YELLOW

BLUE

POP-UP

/MENU

HOME

TOP

VOLUME

BLUETOOTH

NET USBTUNER

INPUT

PROGR AM

SUR. DECODE

BASS

ENHANCER

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

SCENE

4321

8765

HDMI OUT

PARTY

SLEEP

MAIN

ZONE 2

POP-UP

/MENU

HOME

TOP

P-

/MENU

HOM

POP-UP

/MENU

HOME

TOP

POP-UP

/MEN

HOME

SETUP

ENTER

Cursor keys

Use the cursor keys to select “System” and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys to select “Audio In” and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys to select “AV 1” and then select “AV 2”

(audio input jack to be used).

Press SETUP.

This completes the necessary settings.

Setting input sources to be skipped when operating

the INPUT key

Set which input sources are skipped when operating the INPUT key.

You can select the desired input source quickly by using this function.

Setup menu

“System” > “Input Skip”

Input sources

HDMI 1-7, AV 1-2, AUX, AUDIO 1-5, PHONO, TUNER, NET, Bluetooth, USB

Settings

Off Does not skip the selected input source.

On Skips the selected input source.

NOTE

When using AV CONTROLLER, you cannot select the input sources set to “On” in this function.

144

Automatically changing the input source names

displayed on the front display

Automatically changes the input source names displayed on the front display. You can

select a name created by the Auto Rename function.

Setup menu

“System” > “Input Rename”

Input sources

HDMI 1-7, AV 1, AUDIO 1-3

Use the cursor keys to select an input source to be renamed.

Use the cursor keys to select “Auto”.

To change another input source name, repeat steps 1 to 2.

Press SETUP.

This completes the settings.

NOTE

When “Auto” is selected, the created name is saved even after the external device is disconnected. To reset

to the default setting, switch the setting to “Manual

” and then back to “Auto”.

Manually changing the input source names

displayed on the front display

Allows the input source names displayed on the front display to be set manually.

Setup menu

“System” > “Input Rename”

Input sources

HDMI 1-7, AV 1-2, AUX, AUDIO 1-5, PHONO, TUNER, MusicCast Link, SERVER, NET

RADIO, Bluetooth

, USB

Use the cursor keys to select an input source to be renamed.

NOTE

If the input source is set to “Auto”, use the cursor keys to select “Manual”.

Press ENTER.

The cursor moves to the name edit screen.

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to edit the name.

NOTE

▪ To cancel the entry, select “CLEAR”.

▪ To restore the default name, select “RESET”.

Use the cursor keys to select “SAVE” and press ENTER.

To change another input source name, repeat steps 1 to 4.

Press SETUP.

This completes the settings.

145

Setting the use of Auto Play function

Enables/disables Auto Play function in Internet streaming services and following input

sources.

Setup menu

“System” > “Auto Play”

Input sources

(network sources), SERVER, NET RADIO, Bluetooth, USB

Settings

Off Disables Auto Play function.

On Starts automatically to play back the last content which you played back.

Auto

Starts automatically to play back the content which only you played back

at setting the unit to standby mode.

NOTE

In some input sources or content, you might not enable Auto Play function.

Setting sound programs to skip when operating the

PROGRAM key

Set which sound programs are skipped when operating the PROGRAM key.

You can select the desired sound program quickly by using this function.

Setup menu

“System” > “DSP Skip”

Settings

Off Does not skip the selected sound program.

On Skips the selected sound program.

Setting the function for the PROGRAM key on the

remote control

Sets the function that is assigned to the PROGRAM key on the remote control. You can

use the PROGRAM key for other than DSP program selection.

Setup menu

“

System” > “Remote Key” > “PROGRAM Key”

Settings

Assign1 Enables selecting the DSP Programs.

Assign2

Enables selecting just the DSP Movie/Music Programs.

The up key of the PROGRAM keys: toggle between the Movie Programs

The down key of the PROGRAM keys: toggle between the Music

Programs

Assign3 Enables selecting the NETWORK sources.

Assign4 Enables moving to the previous/next page of the Browse Screen.

Assign5 Enables fine-adjusting the subwoofer volume.

Assign6 Enables adjusting the volume of dialogue sounds.

Assign7

Enables selecting shuffle/repeat settings.

The up key of the PROGRAM keys: repeat

The down key of the PROGRAM keys: shuffle

Assign8

Displays the front/on-screen display information.

The up key of the PROGRAM keys: front display information

The down key of the PROGRAM keys: on-screen display information

NOTE

This setting does not change the function of the PROGRAM key on the front panel.

146

Setting the unit's functions for the RED/GREEN/

YELLOW/BLUE keys of the remote control

Set the unit's functions for the RED/GREEN/YELLOW/BLUE keys of the remote control.

Setup menu

“System” > “Remote Key” > “Color Key”

Settings

Default

Assigns the functions of devices connected to the unit with an HDMI

cable.

This setting is effective when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”.

TV Control

Assigns the functions of TV Control to each key.

RED: EXIT (closes the menu on the TV)

GREEN: INFO (displays information about the TV such as the resolution)

YELLOW: BROADCAST (switches the TV broadcast type)

BLUE: INPUT (switches the TV input)

This setting is effective when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”.

NOTE

▪ For details on “HDMI Control” in the “Setup” menu, see the following:

– “Setting the use of HDMI Control” (p.130)

▪ To use HDMI control, you need to perform the HDMI Control link setup after connecting HDMI Control-

compatible devices. For details, see the following:

– “HDMI Control and synchronized operations” (p.191)

▪ HDMI Control might not work properly.

Adjusting the brightness of the front display

Adjusts the brightness of the front display.

Setup menu

“System” > “Display Set” > “Dimmer (Front Display)”

Setting range

-4 to 0 (higher to brighten)

NOTE

The front display may become dark when “ECO Mode” is set to “On”. For details, see the following:

▪ “Setting the use of the eco mode” (p.149)

Setting the scale of the volume display

Switches the scale of the volume display.

Setup menu

“System” > “Display Set” > “Volume”

Settings

dB Displays the volume in the “dB” unit.

0-97 Displays the volume in the numeric value (0-97).

Setting the use of short messages on the TV

Selects whether to display short messages on the TV screen when the unit is operated

(such as input selection and volume adjustment).

Setup menu

“System” > “Display Set” > “Short Message”

Settings

Off Does not display short messages on the TV screen.

On Displays short messages on the TV screen.

Setting the image to be used as wallpaper on the TV

Selects the image to be used as wallpaper on the TV.

Setup menu

“System” > “Display Set” > “Wallpaper”

Settings

Piano Displays the piano image on the TV screen when there is no video signal.

Gray

Displays a gray background on the TV screen when there is no video

signal.

147

Specifying the condition for the TRIGGER OUT jack to

function

Specifies the condition for the TRIGGER OUT jack to function.

Setup menu

“System” > “Trigger Output” > “Trigger Mode”

Settings

Power

The TRIGGER OUT jack functions in sync with the power status of the

zone specified with “

Target Zone.”

Source

The TRIGGER OUT jack functions in sync with the input switching in the

zone specified with “

Target Zone.”

An electronic signal is transmitted according to the setting made in

“Source.”

Manual

Select this to manually switch the output level for electronic signal

transmission with “Manual

.”

NOTE

For details on “Target Zone” in the “Setup” menu, see the following:

▪ “Specifying the zone with which the TRIGGER OUT jack functions are synchronized” (p.148)

Specifying the output level of the electronic signal

transmitted with each input

Specifies the output level of the electronic signal transmitted with each input, switching

when “

Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”.

Setup menu

“

System” > “Trigger Output” > “Trigger Mode” > “Source”

Choices

HDMI 1-7, AV 1-2, AUX, AUDIO 1-5, TUNER, PHONO, (network sources), Bluetooth,

USB, AirPlay, MusicCast Link, SERVER, NET RADIO

Settings

Low

Stops the electronic signal transmission when you switch to the input

source specified in this option.

High

Transmits the electronic signal when you switch to the input source

specified in this option.

Switching the output level for electronic signal

transmission manually

Switches the output level for electronic signal transmission manually when “Trigger

Mode” is set to “Manual”. This setting can also be used to confirm proper function of

the external device connected via the

TRIGGER OUT jack.

Setup menu

“System” > “Trigger Output” > “Trigger Mode” > “Manual”

Settings

Low Stops the electronic signal transmission.

High Transmits the electronic signal.

Specifying the zone with which the TRIGGER OUT

jack functions are synchronized

Specifies the zone with which the TRIGGER OUT jack functions are synchronized.

Setup menu

“System” > “Trigger Output” > “Target Zone”

Settings

Main

When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power,” electronic signal transmission is

synchronized with the power status of the main zone.

When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source,” electronic signal transmission is

synchronized with the input switching in the main zone.

Zone2

When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power,” electronic signal transmission is

synchronized with the power status of Zone2.

When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source,” electronic signal transmission is

synchronized with the input switching in Zone2.

All

When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power,” electronic signal transmission is

synchronized with the power status of the main zone or Zone2.

When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source,” electronic signal transmission is

synchronized with the input switching in the main zone or Zone2.

NOTE

For details on “Trigger Mode” in the “Setup” menu, see the following:

▪ “Specifying the condition for the TRIGGER OUT jack to function” (p.148)

148

Setting the amount of time for the auto-standby

function

Set the amount of time for the auto-standby function.

Setup menu

“System” > “ECO” > “Auto Power Standby”

Settings

Off Does not set the unit to standby mode automatically.

5 minutes, 20 minutes

Sets the unit to standby mode when you have not operated the unit and

the unit has not detected any input signal for the specified time.

2 hours, 4 hours,

8 hours, 12 hours

Sets the unit to standby mode when you have not operated the unit for the

specified time.

NOTE

Just before the unit enters standby mode, “AutoPowerStdby” appears and then countdown starts in the front

display.

Setting the use of the eco mode

You can reduce the unit’s power consumption by setting the eco mode to “On”. After

changing the setting, be sure to press ENTER to restart the unit.

When the eco mode is enabled, you can reduce the unit’s power consumption.

Setup menu

“

System” > “ECO” > “ECO Mode”

Settings

Off Disables the eco mode.

On Enables the eco mode.

NOTE

▪ When “ECO Mode” is set to “On”, the front display may become dark.

▪ If you want to play audio at high volume, set “ECO Mode” to “Off”.

Preventing accidental changes to the settings

Prevents accidental changes to the settings.

Setup menu

“System” > “Memory Guard”

Settings

Off Does not protect the settings.

On Protects the settings until “Off” is selected.

NOTE

When “Memory Guard” is set to “On”, the lock icon (o) is displayed on the menu screen.

149

Updating the firmware via the network

Updates the firmware via the network. You can also check the firmware version and

system ID.

Setup menu

“System” > “Firmware Update”

Choices

Firmware Update Starts the process to update the unit’s firmware.

USB Update

Displays how to update the firmware using a USB memory device in the

“ADVANCED SETUP” menu.

NOTE

▪ “Firmware Update” is not selectable when firmware update is in preparation.

▪ Firmware update takes about 20 minutes or more.

▪ If the Internet connection speed is slow, or the unit is connected to the wireless network, network update

may not be possible depending on the condition of the network. In this case, wait until firmware update is

ready, or update the firmware using the USB memory device. For details on using the USB memory

device, see the following:

– “Updating the firmware (UPDATE)” (p.155)

150

Configuring the advanced settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu)

Basic operation of the ADVANCED SETUP menu

Perform the following basic procedure to operate the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu while

viewing the front display.

Set the unit to standby mode.

While holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press

z (power).

(MAIN ZONE)

STRAIGHT

PROGRAM

The top item and its setting of the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu appear on

the front display.

Press PROGRAM to select an item.

Press STRAIGHT to select a setting.

Press z (power) to set the unit to standby mode and turn it on

again.

This completes the settings.

NOTE

For details on the default settings, see the following:

▪ “Default settings of the ADVANCED SETUP menu” (p.202)

ADVANCED SETUP menu items

Use the following table to configure system settings of the unit.

Item Function Page

SP IMP. Changes the speaker impedance setting. p.152

REMOTE ID Selects the unit’s remote control ID. p.152

(Asia and General models only)

Changes the FM/AM tuning frequency setting.

p.152

TV FORMAT Switches the video signal type of HDMI output. p.152

MON.CHK Removes the limitation on HDMI video output. p.153

4K MODE Selects the HDMI 4K signal format. p.153

DTS MODE

Selects the information to be sent to the BD player connected to

the unit about the DTS formats that the unit supports.

p.154

BKUP/RSTR Backups and restores all the settings for the unit. p.154

INIT Restores the default settings. p.155

UPDATE Updates the firmware. p.155

VERSION Checks the version of firmware currently installed on the unit. p.155

151

Changing the speaker impedance setting (SP IMP.)

ENHANCER

LINK

ECO

MASTER

OUT

YPAO

VOL.

DRC

SLEEP

STEREO

PARTY

TUNED

ZONE

3 B2 A

VOL .

FPR

SBL SB SBR

FPL

MUT E VIR TUAL

SP IMP.••8¬MIN

Change the unit’s speaker impedance settings depending on the impedance of the

speakers connected.

ADVANCED SETUP menu

“SP IMP.”

Settings

6 Ω MIN Select this option when you connect 6-ohm speakers to the unit.

8 Ω MIN Select this option when you connect 8-ohm or higher speakers to the unit.

Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTE ID)

ENHANCER

LINK

ECO

MASTER

OUT

YPAO

VOL.

DRC

SLEEP

STEREO

PARTY

TUNED

ZONE

3 B2 A

VOL .

FPR

SBL SB SBR

FPL

MUT E VIR TUAL

REMOTE ID••ID1

Change the unit’s remote control ID so that it matches the remote control’s ID (default:

ID1). When using multiple Yamaha AV receivers, you can set each remote control with

a unique remote control ID for its corresponding receiver.

ADVANCED SETUP menu

“REMOTE ID”

Settings

ID1, ID2

Changing the remote control ID of the remote control

• To select ID1, while holding down the left cursor key, hold down SCENE (1) for 5

seconds.

• To select ID2, while holding down the left cursor key, hold down SCENE (2) for 5

seconds.

Changing the FM/AM tuning frequency setting (TU)

(Asia and General models only)

ENHANCER

LINK

ECO

MASTER

OUT

YPAO

VOL.

DRC

SLEEP

STEREO

PARTY

TUNED

ZONE

3 B2 A

VOL .

FPR

SBL SB SBR

FPL

MUT E VIR TUAL

TU••••FM50/AM9

Change the FM/AM tuning frequency setting of the unit depending on your country or

region.

ADVANCED SETUP menu

“TU”

Settings

FM100/AM10

Select this when you want to adjust the FM frequency by 100-kHz steps

and AM by 10-kHz steps.

FM50/AM9

Select this when you want to adjust the FM frequency by 50-kHz steps

and AM by 9-kHz steps.

Switching the video signal type (TV FORMAT)

ENHANCER

LINK

ECO

MASTER

OUT

YPAO

VOL.

DRC

SLEEP

STEREO

PARTY

TUNED

ZONE

3 B2 A

VOL .

FPR

SBL SB SBR

FPL

MUT E VIR TUAL

TV FORMAT•NTSC

Switch the video signal type of HDMI output so that it matches to the format of your TV.

Since the unit automatically selects the video signal type so that it matches to the TV, it

is unnecessary to change the setting normally. Change the setting only when images

on the TV screen do not appear correctly.

ADVANCED SETUP menu

“TV FORMAT”

Settings

NTSC, PAL

152

Removing the limitation on HDMI video output

(MON.CHK)

ENHANCER

LINK

ECO

MASTER

OUT

YPAO

VOL.

DRC

SLEEP

STEREO

PARTY

TUNED

ZONE

3 B2 A

VOL .

FPR

SBL SB SBR

FPL

MUT E VIR TUAL

MON.CHK••••YES

The unit automatically detects resolutions supported by a TV connected to the HDMI

OUT jack.

Disable the monitor check function if you want to specify a resolution in “Resolution”

when the unit cannot detect the TV’s resolution or when you want to specify a different

resolution than the detected resolution.

ADVANCED SETUP menu

“MON.CHK”

Settings

YES

Enables the monitor check function. (Outputs video signals with a

resolution supported by the TV only.)

SKIP

Disables the monitor check function. (Outputs video signals with a

specified resolution regardless of compatibility with the TV.)

NOTE

▪ For details on “Resolution” in the “Setup” menu, see the following:

– “Setting a resolution to output HDMI video signals” (p.129)

▪ Reset to “YES” if the unit becomes inoperable because video from the unit cannot be displayed on the TV

after “MON.CHK” has been set to “SKIP”.

Selecting the HDMI 4K signal format (4K MODE)

ENHANCER

LINK

ECO

MASTER

OUT

YPAO

VOL.

DRC

SLEEP

STEREO

PARTY

TUNED

ZONE

3 B2 A

VOL .

FPR

SBL SB SBR

FPL

MUT E VIR TUAL

4K MODE•MODE 1

Selects the format of signals input/output at the unit when HDMI 4K compatible TV and

playback device are connected to the unit.

ADVANCED SETUP menu

“4K MODE”

Settings

MODE 1

Inputs/outputs 4K signals shown in the following table. Depending on the

connected device or HDMI cables, video may not be displayed correctly.

In this case, select “MODE 2”.

MODE 2 Inputs/outputs 4K signals shown in the following table.

NOTE

When “MODE 1” is selected, use a Premium High Speed HDMI Cable or Premium High Speed Cable with

Ethernet.

Format

MODE 1 MODE 2

8 bit 10 bit 12 bit 8 bit 10 bit 12 bit

4K/60, 50 Hz

RGB 4:4:4

– –

YCbCr 4:4:4

– –

YCbCr 4:2:2

–

YCbCr 4:2:0

4 4

–

4K/30, 25, 24 Hz

RGB 4:4:4

4 4

–

YCbCr 4:4:4

4 4

–

YCbCr 4:2:2

4 4

153

Setting DTS Format Notification (DTS MODE)

ENHANCER

LINK

ECO

MASTER

OUT

YPAO

VOL.

DRC

SLEEP

STEREO

PARTY

TUNED

ZONE

3B2A

VOL.

FPR

SBL SB SBR

FPL

MUTE VIRTUAL

DTS MODE•MODE1

This setting informs the BD player about the DTS formats that the unit supports.

ADVANCED SETUP menu

“DTS MODE”

Settings

MODE 1

This mode conforms to the DTS:X standard.

Use this setting under normal circumstances.

MODE 2

Use this setting if the BD player fails to properly output a DTS signal even

when it is playing back DTS-HD or DTS:X content.

Backuping and restoring all the settings (BKUP/RSTR)

ENHANCER

LINK

ECO

MASTER

OUT

YPAO

VOL.

DRC

SLEEP

STEREO

PARTY

TUNED

ZONE

3 B2 A

VOL .

FPR

SBL SB SBR

FPL

MUT E VIR TUAL

BKUP/RSTR•BKUP

Backups and restores all the unit's setting to a USB memory device. Prepare a USB

memory device using FAT16 or FAT32 format in advance.

ADVANCED SETUP menu

“BKUP/RSTR”

Settings

BKUP Backups all the settings.

RSTR Restores all the previous backuped settings.

Connect the USB memory device to the USB jack on the front

panel.

To start the process, press STRAIGHT to select “BKUP” or

“RSTR” and then press INFO on the front panel.

Press INFO again after the confirmation message appears on the

front display.

When “Complete” appears on the front display, press z (power)

to set the unit to standby mode and turn it on again.

If “Failed” appears on the front display, check the following and start the

process again.

In case of “BKUP”:

• You cannot overwrite save. When you save the settings repeatedly, please move the

file in different folder.

• The file is stored by the name of “MC_backup_(model name).dat” in the route of the

USB memory device.

In case of “RSTR”:

• Check that the file is stored in the route of the USB memory device.

NOTE

▪ “RSTR” is effective after backuping all the settings.

▪ Do not turn off the unit during the backuping and restoring process. Otherwise, the settings may not be

restored correctly.

▪ The user information (such as account, password) is not saved.

154

Restoring the default settings (INIT)

ENHANCER

LINK

ECO

MASTER

OUT

YPAO

VOL.

DRC

SLEEP

STEREO

PARTY

TUNED

ZONE

3 B2 A

VOL .

FPR

SBL SB SBR

FPL

MUT E VIR TUAL

INIT••••CANCEL

Restores the default settings for the unit.

ADVANCED SETUP menu

“INIT”

Choices

VIDEO Restores the default settings for video configurations.

ALL Restores the default settings for the unit.

CANCEL Does not perform an initialization.

Updating the firmware (UPDATE)

ENHANCER

LINK

ECO

MASTER

OUT

YPAO

VOL.

DRC

SLEEP

STEREO

PARTY

TUNED

ZONE

3 B2 A

VOL .

FPR

SBL SB SBR

FPL

MUT E VIR TUAL

UPDATE•••••USB

New firmware that provides additional features or product improvements will be

released as needed. Updates can be downloaded from our website to a USB memory

device. You can update the firmware using this USB memory device. For details, refer

to the information supplied with updates.

ADVANCED SETUP menu

“UPDATE”

Choices

USB Update the firmware using a USB memory device.

NETWORK Update the firmware via the network.

NOTE

Do not perform this menu unless firmware update is necessary. Also, make sure you read the information

supplied with updates before updating the firmware.

Checking the firmware version (VERSION)

ENHANCER

LINK

ECO

MASTER

OUT

YPAO

VOL.

DRC

SLEEP

STEREO

PARTY

TUNED

ZONE

3 B2 A

VOL .

FPR

SBL SB SBR

FPL

MUT E VIR TUAL

VERSION••xx.xx

Check the version of firmware currently installed on the unit.

ADVANCED SETUP menu

“VERSION”

155

TROUBLESHOOTING

When any problem appears

If trouble occurs, first check the following:

Make sure of the following when the unit does not function properly.

• The power cables of the unit, TV and playback devices (such as BD/DVD players)

are connected to AC wall outlets securely.

• The unit, subwoofer, TV and playback devices (such as BD/DVD players) are turned

on.

• The connectors of each cable are securely inserted in to jacks on each device.

If there is no problem with the power and cables, refer to the instructions shown in

“When any problem appears” corresponding to the trouble of the unit.

If the problem you are experiencing is not listed or if the instructions do not help, turn

off the unit, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized Yamaha

dealer or service center.

Power, system, or remote control trouble

The power does not turn on

l The protection circuitry has been activated three times consecutively.

If the standby indicator on the unit blinks when you try to turn on the power, as a

safety precaution, capability to turn on the power is disabled. Contact your nearest

Yamaha dealer or service center to request repair.

The power does not turn on in synchronization with the

l HDMI Control on the unit is disabled.

If turning off the unit is not synchronized to the TV either, check the setting of HDMI

Control on the unit. For details on HDMI Control, see the following:

– “Setting the use of HDMI Control” (p.130)

l HDMI Control on the TV is disabled.

If only turning on the unit is not synchronized to the TV, check the setting on the

TV. For details, refer to the instruction manual for the TV and set HDMI Control on

the TV.

l Because of a power failure, the unit's power is no longer synchronized.

Disconnect the HDMI cables and power cables, and after five minutes, reconnect

the cables of playback devices first, then the unit, and then the TV. Then, check

that the power is synchronized.

The power does not turn off

l The internal microcomputer has frozen, due to an external electric shock (such

as lightning or excessive static electricity) or to a drop in the power supply

voltage.

Hold down z (power) on the front panel for more than 15 seconds to reboot the

unit. If the problem persists, disconnect the power cable from the AC wall outlet

and plug it again.

156

The power turns off (standby mode) immediately

l The unit was turned on while a speaker cable was shorted.

Twist the bare wires of each speaker cable firmly and reconnect to the unit and

speakers. For details, see the following:

– “Connecting the speaker” (p.19)

The unit enters standby mode automatically

l The sleep timer worked.

Turn on the unit and start playback again.

l The auto-standby function activated because the unit was not used for the

specified time.

To disable the auto-standby function, set “Auto Power Standby” in the “Setup”

menu to “Off”. For details, see the following:

– “Setting the amount of time for the auto-standby function” (p.149)

l The speaker impedance setting is incorrect.

Set the speaker impedance to match your speakers. For details, see the following:

– “Changing the speaker impedance setting (SP IMP.)” (p.152)

l The protection circuitry has been activated because of a short circuit.

Twist the bare wires of each speaker cable firmly and reconnect to the unit and

speakers. For details, see the following:

– “Connecting the speaker” (p.19)

The unit is not reacting

l The internal microcomputer is frozen, due to an external electric shock (such

as lightning or excessive static electricity) or to a drop in the power supply

voltage.

Hold down z (power) on the front panel for more than 15 seconds to reboot the

unit. If the problem persists, disconnect the power cable from the AC wall outlet

and plug it again.

The unit cannot be controlled using the remote control

l The unit is out of the operating range.

Use the remote control within the operating range. For details, see the following:

– “Operating range of the remote control” (p.9)

l The batteries are weak.

Replace with new batteries.

l The unit’s remote control sensor is exposed to direct sunlight or strong

lighting.

Adjust the lighting angle, or reposition the unit.

l The remote control IDs of the unit and the remote control are not identical.

Change the remote control ID of the unit or the remote control. For details, see the

following:

– “Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTE ID)” (p.152)

l The remote control is set to the Zone2 operation mode.

Set the remote control to the Main zone operation mode. For details, see the

following:

– “Part names and functions of the remote control” (p.16)

157

Cannot select the desired input source even if “INPUT”

is pressed

l The function which skips some input sources is set.

Set “Input Skip” of the desired input source in the “Setup” menu to “Off”. For

details, see the following:

– “Setting input sources to be skipped when operating the INPUT key” (p.144)

The RED/GREEN/YELLOW/BLUE keys of the remote

control do not operate

l The device which is connected to the unit via HDMI does not support the

operation of the RED/GREEN/YELLOW/BLUE keys.

Use a device which supports the operation of the RED/GREEN/YELLOW/BLUE

keys.

l The settings of the RED/GREEN/YELLOW/BLUE keys of the unit's remote

control have been changed.

Set the “Color Key” settings in the “Setup” menu to “Default”. For details, see the

following:

– “Setting the unit's functions for the RED/GREEN/YELLOW/BLUE keys of the

remote control”

(p.

147)

Audio trouble

No sound

l Another input source is selected.

Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys. For details, see

the following:

– “Basic procedure for playing back video and music” (p.61)

l Signals that the unit cannot reproduce are being input.

Some digital audio formats cannot be played back on the unit. Ensure that the

signals are types that the unit is able to play back. For details on supported file

formats, HDMI audio formats or compatible decoding format, see the following:

– “Supported file formats” (p.189)

– “Specifications” (p.195)

l The power of Zone2 is not turned on.

Slide the Zone switch to “ZONE 2”, and then press z (receiver power) to the

power of Zone2 turns on. For details, see the following:

– “Controlling Zone2” (p.59)

l The cable connecting the unit and playback device is defective.

If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.

The volume cannot be increased

l The maximum volume is set too low.

Use “Max Volume” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the maximum volume. For details,

see the following:

– “Setting the limit value of the volume” (p.125)

l A device connected to the output jacks of the unit is not turned on.

Turn on all devices connected to the output jacks of the unit.

158

No sound is coming from a specific speaker

l The playback source does not contain a signal for the channel.

To check it, display information about the current audio signal on the TV. For

details, see the following:

– “Checking the current audio signal information” (p.117)

l The currently selected sound program/decoder does not use the speaker.

To check it, use “Test Tone” in the “Setup” menu. For details, see the following:

– “Outputting test tones” (p.116)

l Audio output of the speaker is disabled.

Perform YPAO or use “Configuration” in the “Setup” menu to change the speaker

settings. For details, see the following:

– “Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO)” (p.42)

– “Setting the use of a subwoofer” (p.114)

– “Setting the size of the front speakers” (p.110)

– “Setting the use of a center speaker and its size” (p.111)

– “Setting the use of surround speakers and their size” (p.111)

– “Setting the use of surround back speakers and their size” (p.112)

– “Setting the use of presence speakers and their size” (p.113)

l The volume of the speaker is set too low.

Perform YPAO or use “Level” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the speaker volume.

For details, see the following:

– “Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO)” (p.42)

– “Adjusting the volume of each speaker” (p.114)

l The speaker cable connecting the unit and the speaker is defective.

Check the unit’s SPEAKERS terminals and the speaker’s terminals. If there is no

problem with the connection, replace a breaking speaker cable with another

speaker cable.

l The speaker is malfunctioning.

To check it, replace with another speaker. If the problem persists with using

another speaker, the unit may be malfunctioning.

No sound is coming from the subwoofer

l The playback source does not contain Low Frequency Effect (LFE) or low-

frequency signals.

To check it, set “Extra Bass” in the “Option” menu to “On”, in order to output the

front channel low-frequency components from the subwoofer. For details, see the

following:

– “Setting the use of Extra Bass” (p.99)

l Subwoofer output is disabled.

Perform YPAO or set “Subwoofer” in the “Setup” menu to “Use”. For details, see

the following:

– “Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO)” (p.42)

– “Setting the use of a subwoofer” (p.114)

l The volume of the subwoofer is too low.

Adjust the volume on the subwoofer.

l The subwoofer has been turned off by its auto-standby function.

Disable the auto-standby function of the subwoofer or adjust its sensitivity level.

159

No sound from the playback device connected to the

unit with HDMI

l The TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection).

Refer to the instruction manuals for the TV and check the TV’s specifications.

l The number of devices connected to the HDMI OUT jack exceeds the limit.

Disconnect some of the HDMI devices.

No sound from the playback device when HDMI Control

is used

l The TV is set to output audio from the TV speakers.

Change the audio output setting on your TV so that the playback device audio is

output from the speakers connected to the unit.

l TV audio is selected as the input source.

Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys.

No sound from the TV when HDMI Control is used

l The TV is set to output audio from the TV speakers.

Change the audio output setting on your TV so that the TV audio is output from the

speakers connected to the unit.

l A TV that does not support ARC is connected to the unit only with an HDMI

cable.

Use a digital optical cable to make an audio connection. For details, see the

following:

– “HDMI connection with a TV” (p.30)

l If the TV is connected to the unit with an audio cable, the TV audio input

setting does not match the actual connection.

Use “TV Audio Input” in the “Setup” menu to select the correct audio input jack.

For details, see the following:

– “Setting the audio jack used for TV audio input” (p.130)

l If you are trying to use ARC, ARC is disabled on the unit or TV.

Set “ARC” in the “Setup” menu to “On”, and enable ARC on the TV. For details,

see the following:

– “Setting the use of ARC” (p.130)

Only the front speakers work on multichannel audio

l The playback device is set to output 2-channel audio (such as PCM) only.

To check it, display information about the current audio signal on the TV. If

necessary, change the digital audio output setting on the playback device. For

details, see the following:

– “Checking the current audio signal information” (p.117)

Noise/hum is heard

l The unit is too close to another digital or radio frequency device.

Move the unit further away from the device.

l The cable connecting the unit and playback device is defective.

If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.

The sound is distorted

l The volume of the unit is too high.

Turn down the volume. If “ECO Mode” in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”, set it to

“Off”. For details, see the following:

– “Setting the use of the eco mode” (p.149)

l A device (such as an external power amplifier) connected to the unit’s audio

output jacks is not turned on.

Turn on all devices connected to the unit’s audio output jacks.

160

Video trouble

No video

l Another input source is selected on the unit.

Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys.

l Another input source is selected on the TV.

Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit.

l The video signal output from the unit is not supported by the TV.

Check the video output setting of the playback device. For information about video

signals supported by the TV, refer to the instruction manuals for the TV.

l The cable connecting the unit and TV (or playback device) is defective.

If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.

No video from the playback device connected to the

unit with HDMI

l The input video signal (resolution) is not supported by the unit.

To check the information about the current video signal (resolution) and video

signals supported by the unit, see the following:

– “Checking the current video and HDMI signal information” (p.129)

– “HDMI signal compatibility” (p.193)

l The TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection).

Refer to the instruction manuals for the TV and check the TV’s specifications.

l The number of devices connected to the HDMI OUT jack is over the limit.

Disconnect some of the HDMI devices.

No image (contents required the HDCP 2.2/2.3 -

compatible HDMI device) from the playback device

l The TV (HDMI input jack) does not support HDCP 2.2/2.3.

Connect the unit to the TV (HDMI input jack) that supports HDCP 2.2/2.3. (The

Warning message can be displayed on the TV screen.)

The menu of the unit is not displayed on the TV

l Another input source is selected on the TV.

Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).

The video is interrupted

l If you are using two TVs in the Main zone, another TV is turned off when “HDMI

OUT 1+2” is selected.

Select “HDMI OUT 1” or “HDMI OUT 2” to output the signals only to the TV you are

using. For details on selecting HDMI output, see the following:

– “Selecting an HDMI output jack” (p.62)

161

FM/AM radio trouble (AM radio feature is not

available for the U.K., Europe, Russia, Middle East

and Australia models)

FM radio reception is weak or noisy

l There is multi-path interference.

Adjust the FM antenna height or orientation, or place it in a different location.

l Your area is too far from the FM station transmitter.

To select monaural FM radio reception, set “FM Mode” in the “Option” menu to

“Monaural

”. Or use an outdoor FM antenna. For details on “

FM Mode”, see the

following:

– “Switching between stereo and monaural for FM radio reception” (p.101)

AM radio reception is weak or noisy

l The noises may be caused by fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats, or other

electrical equipment.

It is difficult to completely eliminate noise. It may be reduced by using an outdoor

AM antenna.

Radio stations cannot be selected automatically

l Your area is too far from the FM station transmitter.

Select the station manually. Or use an outdoor antenna. We recommend using a

sensitive multi-element antenna. For details on selecting the station manually, see

the following:

– “Selecting a frequency for reception” (p.66)

l The AM radio signal is weak.

Adjust the AM antenna orientation. Select the station manually. Use an outdoor AM

antenna. For details on selecting the station manually, see the following:

– “Selecting a frequency for reception” (p.66)

AM radio stations cannot be registered as presets

l Auto Preset has been used.

Auto Preset is for registering FM radio stations only. Register AM radio stations

manually. For details, see the following:

– “Registering a radio station manually” (p.68)

162

DAB radio trouble (U.K., Europe, Russia, Middle East

and Australia models)

No DAB radio reception

l An initial scan has not been performed.

Perform an initial scan to receive DAB radio. For details, see the following:

– “Preparing the DAB tuning” (p.70)

No DAB radio reception even after performing an initial

scan

l Reception strength of DAB radio is poor.

Check reception strength in “Tune AID” in the “Option” menu, and adjust the

antenna height or orientation, or place it in a different location. For details, see the

following:

– “Checking reception strength of each DAB channel label” (p.75)

l There is no DAB coverage in your area.

Check with your dealer or WorldDMB online at “http://www.worlddab.org” for a

listing of the DAB coverage in your area.

DAB radio reception is weak or noisy

l There is multi-path interference.

Check reception strength in “Tune AID” in the “Option” menu, and adjust the

antenna height or orientation, or place it in a different location. For details, see the

following:

– “Checking reception strength of each DAB channel label” (p.75)

l Your area is too far from the DAB station transmitter.

Use an outdoor antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element antenna.

DAB information is not available or is inaccurate

l The selected DAB radio station may be temporarily out of service or may not

provide information.

Contact the DAB broadcaster.

No DAB radio sound

l The selected DAB radio station may be temporarily out of service.

Try the station later or select another station.

163

USB trouble

The unit does not detect the USB device

l The USB device is not connected to the USB jack securely.

Turn off the unit, reconnect your USB device, and turn the unit on again.

l The file system of the USB device is not FAT16 or FAT32.

Use a USB device with FAT16 or FAT32 format.

Folders and files in the USB device cannot be viewed

l The data in the USB device is protected by the encryption.

Use a USB device without an encryption function.

The unit does not perform continuous playback on files

of USB device

l When the unit detects a series of unsupported files during playback, playback

stops automatically.

Do not save unsupported files (such as images and hidden files) in folders for

playback.

Network trouble

The network feature does not function

l The network parameters (IP address) have not been obtained properly.

Enable the DHCP server function on your router and set “DHCP” in the “Setup”

menu to “On” on the unit. If you want to configure the network parameters

manually, check that you are using an IP address which is not used by other

network devices in your network. For details, see the following:

– “Setting the network parameters automatically (DHCP)” (p.132)

– “Setting the network parameters manually” (p.133)

l The unit does not support IPv6 network.

Connect IPv4 network.

The unit cannot connect to the Internet via a wireless

router (access point)

l The wireless router (access point) is turned off.

Turn on the wireless router.

l The unit and the wireless router (access point) are too far apart.

Place the unit and the wireless router (access point) closer to each other.

l There is an obstacle between the unit and the wireless router (access point).

Move the unit and the wireless router (access point) in a location where there are

no obstacles between them.

l The wireless router (access point) is set to use the wireless channel 14.

Change settings of the wireless router (access point) to use one of the wireless

channels from 1 to 13.

Wireless network is not found

l Microwave ovens or other wireless devices in your neighborhood might

disturb the wireless communication.

Turn off these devices.

l Access to the network is restricted by the firewall settings of the wireless

router (access point).

Check the firewall setting of the wireless router (access point).

164

The unit does not detect the media server (PC/NAS)

l The media sharing setting is not correct.

Configure the sharing setting and select the unit as a device to which music

contents are shared. For details, see the following:

– “Media sharing setup on media servers (PCs/NAS)” (p.85)

l Some security software installed on your media server is blocking the access

of the unit to your media server.

Check the settings of security software installed on your media server.

l The unit and media server are not in the same network.

Check the network connections and your router settings, and then connect the unit

and the media server to the same network.

l The MAC address filter is enabled on the unit.

In “MAC Address Filter” in the “Setup” menu, disable the MAC address filter or

specify the MAC address of your media server to allow it to access to the unit. For

details, see the following:

– “Setting the MAC address filter” (p.134)

The files in the media server (PC/NAS) cannot be

viewed or played back

l The files are not supported by the unit or the media server.

Use the file format supported by both the unit and the media server. For

information about the file formats supported by the unit, see the following:

– “Supported file formats” (p.189)

The Internet radio cannot be played

l The selected Internet radio station is currently not available.

There may be a network problem at the radio station, or the service may have

been stopped. Try the station later or select another station.

l The selected Internet radio station is currently broadcasting silence.

Some Internet radio stations broadcast silence at certain of times of the day. Try

the station later or select another station.

l Access to the network is restricted by the firewall settings of your network

devices (such as the router).

Check the firewall settings of your network devices. The Internet radio can be

played only when it passes through the port designated by each radio station. The

port number varies depending on the radio station.

The iPhone does not recognize the unit when using

AirPlay

l The unit is connected to a multiple SSID router.

Access to the unit might be restricted by the network separation function on the

router. Connect the iPhone to the SSID which can access the unit. (Connect it to

the Primary SSID at the top of the list.)

165

The application for mobile devices does not detect the

unit

l The unit and mobile device are not in the same network.

Check the network connections and your router settings, and then connect the unit

and mobile device to the same network.

l The MAC address filter is enabled on the unit.

In “MAC Address Filter” in the “Setup” menu, disable the MAC address filter or

specify the MAC address of your mobile device to allow it to access to the unit. For

details, see the following:

– “Setting the MAC address filter” (p.134)

l The unit is connected to a multiple SSID router.

Access to the unit might be restricted by the network separation function on the

router. Connect the iPhone to the SSID which can access the unit. (Connect it to

the Primary SSID at the top of the list.)

Firmware update via the network is failed

l It may not be possible depending on the condition of the network.

Update the firmware via the network again or use a USB memory device. For

details, see the following:

– “Updating the firmware via the network” (p.150)

Bluetooth® trouble

A Bluetooth® connection cannot be established

l The Bluetooth function of the unit is disabled.

Enable the Bluetooth function. For details, see the following:

– “Setting the use of Bluetooth

” (p.

136

)

l Another Bluetooth device is already connected to the unit.

Terminate the current Bluetooth connection and then establish a new connection.

For details, see the following:

– “Playback Bluetooth

device music on the unit” (p.81)

l The unit and the Bluetooth device are too far apart.

Move the Bluetooth device closer to the unit.

l There is a device (such as microwave oven and wireless LAN) that outputs

signals in the 2.4 GHz frequency band nearby.

Move the unit and the Bluetooth device away from those devices.

l The Bluetooth device does not support A2DP.

Use a Bluetooth device that supports A2DP.

l The connection information registered on the Bluetooth device is not working

for some reason.

Delete the connection information on the Bluetooth device, and then establish a

connection between the Bluetooth device and the unit again. For details, see the

following:

– “Playback Bluetooth

device music on the unit” (p.

81)

166

No sound is produced, or the sound is interrupted

during playback with Bluetooth® connection

l The volume of the Bluetooth device is set too low.

Turn up the volume of the Bluetooth device.

l The Bluetooth device is not set to send audio signals to the unit.

Switch the audio output of the Bluetooth device to the unit.

l The Bluetooth connection has been terminated.

Establish a Bluetooth connection between the Bluetooth device and the unit again.

For details, see the following:

– “Playback Bluetooth

device music on the unit”

(p.81)

l The unit and the Bluetooth device are too far apart.

Move the Bluetooth device closer to the unit.

l There is a device (such as microwave oven and wireless LAN) that outputs

signals in the 2.4 GHz frequency band nearby.

Move the unit and the Bluetooth device away from those devices.

167

Error indications on the front display

Refer to the following table when the error message is indicated on the front display.

Message Cause Remedy

Access denied

Access to the media servers (PCs/NAS) is denied.

Configure the sharing settings and select the unit as a device to which music contents are shared. For

details, see the following:

• “Media sharing setup on media servers (PCs/NAS)” (p.85)

Access error

The unit cannot access the USB device. Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.

There is a problem with the signal path from the network to the unit.

Make sure your router and modem are turned on, and check the connection between the unit and your

router (or hub). For details, see the following:

• “Connecting a network cable (wired connection)” (p.36)

• “Preparing wireless antennas (wireless connection)” (p.37)

Check SP Wires

The speaker cables are short circuited.

Twist the bare wires of the cables firmly and connect to the unit and speakers properly. For details, see

the following:

• “Connecting the speaker” (p.19)

Internal Error

An internal error has occurred. Contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center.

No content

There are no playable files in the selected folder. Select a folder that contains files supported by the unit.

No device

The unit cannot detect the USB device. Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.

Not connected

The network cable is not connected. Connect the network cable properly.

The wireless router (access point) is not found. Make sure the wireless router (access point) is turned on.

Please wait

The unit is preparing for connecting to the network.

Wait until the message disappears. If the message stays more than 3 minutes, turn off the unit and turn

it on again.

RemID Mismatch

The remote control IDs of the unit and the remote control are not

identical.

Change the remote control ID of the unit or the remote control. For details, see the following:

• “Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTE ID)” (p.152)

Unable to play

The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the iPhone for some

reason.

Check the song data. If it cannot be played on the iPhone itself, the song data or storage area may be

defective.

The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the media servers

(PCs/NAS) for some reason.

Ensure that the files are types that the unit is able to play back. If the unit supports the file format, but

still cannot play back any files, the network may be overloaded with heavy traffic. For information about

the formats supported by the unit, see the following:

• “Supported file formats” (p.189)

USB Overloaded

An overcurrent is flowing through the USB device. Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.

Version error

Firmware update failed.

Update the firmware again. For details, see the following:

• “Updating the firmware (UPDATE)” (p.155)

• “Updating the unit’s firmware via the network” (p.171)

168

Message Cause Remedy

Update failed.

Firmware update failed.

Press STRAIGHT and select a firmware updating method, then press INFO to update the firmware

again. For details, see the following:

• “Updating the firmware (UPDATE)” (p.155)

• “Updating the unit’s firmware via the network” (p.171)

FILE NOT READY

Preparation for firmware update is not finish yet. Wait a while before updating the firmware again.

169

APPENDIX

Updating the unit’s firmware via the network

Firmware updates

New firmware that provides additional features or product improvements will be

released as needed. If the unit is connected to the Internet, new firmware is

downloaded via the network. When a firmware update is ready, the following message

appears after SETUP is pressed.

For details on the firmware update, see the following:

• “Updating the unit’s firmware via the network” (p.171)

NOTICE

▪ Do not operate the unit or disconnect the power cable or network cable during firmware update. If the

firmware update is interrupted, there is a possibility that the unit will malfunction. In this case, contact

your nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center to request repair.

NOTE

▪ The firmware update indicator on the front display lights up when a firmware update is ready. This

indicator might not light up when the network connection speed is too slow or a later firmware update is

available.

▪ Firmware update takes about 20 minutes or more.

▪ You might not get the message or the lighting up firmware update indicator on the front display depending

on the condition of the network connection. In this case, update the firmware using the USB memory

device. For details, see the following:

– “Updating the firmware (UPDATE)” (p.155)

▪ For details on firmware updates, visit the Yamaha website.

170

Updating the unit’s firmware via the network

Confirm the on-screen description displayed after SETUP is pressed, and start the

firmware update.

Read the on-screen description.

Use the cursor keys to select “START” and press ENTER.

The on-screen display turns off and the firmware update begins.

If “UPDATE SUCCESS PLEASE POWER OFF!” appears on the

front display, press MAIN ZONE z on the front panel.

The firmware update is complete.

NOTE

▪ Firmware update takes about 20 minutes or more.

▪ You might not get the message or the lighting up firmware update indicator on the front display depending

on the condition of the network connection. In this case, update the firmware using the USB memory

device. For details on using the USB memory device, see the following:

– “Updating the firmware (UPDATE)” (p.155)

▪ For details on update, visit the Yamaha website.

▪ If you want to perform update when turning off the unit, use the cursor keys to select “LATER” and press

ENTER in step 2. When you turn off the unit, a screen asking you to confirm the firmware update is

displayed, and press

ENTER to start the firmware update. After the firmware update is complete, the unit

will turn off automatically.

▪

To perform update when turning off the unit, refer to the following instructions and supplementary

explanations.

– The firmware update can be started by pressing INFO on the front panel.

– The unit turns off automatically without performing the firmware update if two minutes pass after the

screen to confirm the firmware update is displayed.

– To cancel the firmware update process, press RETURN, and the unit will turn off.

– The unit turns off without performing the firmware update if you turn off the unit with AV CONTROLLER

or MusicCast CONTROLLER.

171

Using wireless surround speakers (MusicCast Surround function)

Using wireless surround speakers (MusicCast

Surround function)

Using devices that support the MusicCast Surround function, you can enjoy a 5.1.2-

channel or 5.1-channel system with wireless surround speakers and subwoofer.

NOTE

▪ For details on the 5.1.2-channel or 5.1-channel system, see the following:

– “Using 5.1.2-channel system” (p.22)

▪ Refer to the instruction manual of the devices that support the MusicCast Surround function for details on

settings and operations.

Devices supporting MusicCast Surround

As of December 1, 2018

MusicCast 50 MusicCast 20 MusicCast SUB 100

Wireless Streaming Speaker Network Subwoofer

Sample speaker layout

The following is a 5.1.2-channel system using two MusicCast 20 speakers as the

surround speakers and one MusicCast SUB 100 as the subwoofer.

E R

NOTE

▪ In a 5.1.2-channel or 5.1-channel system, the surround speakers and subwoofer can be wireless. With

other systems, only the subwoofer can be wireless.

▪ With wireless surround speakers

– Sound will not be output from the speaker terminals (SURROUND) and pre-out jacks (SURROUND) on

the unit.

– Surround back speakers cannot be used.

▪ With a wireless subwoofer

– One subwoofer can be wireless.

– Sound will not be output from the pre-out jacks (SUBWOOFER 1 and 2) on the unit. Therefore, another

subwoofer cannot be used by connecting it with an audio cable.

▪ The following audio cannot be output from the wireless surround speakers and subwoofer.

– DSD audio

– DVD-Audio and Super Audio CD (SACD) from HDMI input

172

The unit and the devices supporting MusicCast Surround must be

registered with the same location on the MusicCast

CONTROLLER app.

Follow the app’s on-screen instructions to complete setup of the

MusicCast Surround function.

Tap the

settings icon.

Tap “MusicCast

Surround/Stereo”.

For detailed setup instructions, refer to the following.

https://download.yamaha.com/files/tcm:39-1212383

Adjust the speaker settings automatically (YPAO).

NOTE

▪ For details on YPAO, see the following:

– “Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO)” (p.42)

▪ Multi measurement cannot be used.

Check the settings.

And then, you can enjoy content playback with the MusicCast

CONTROLLER app.

173

Connecting to a network wirelessly

Selecting a wireless network connection method

Select a wireless connection method according to your network environment.

NOTE

▪ You need to configure the network settings if your router does not support DHCP or if you want to

configure the network parameters manually. For details, see the following:

– “Setting the network parameters manually” (p.133)

▪ When the unit is added to a MusicCast network, the network settings can be configured at the same time.

If you use MusicCast, this method is recommended. For details, see the following:

– “Adding the unit to the MusicCast network” (p.49)

Mobile device

(such as iPhone)

Internet

Modem

Wireless router

The unit

Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit.

Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video from the

unit (HDMI OUT jack).

Press SETUP.

Use the cursor keys to select “Network” and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys to select “Network Connection” and press

ENTER.

Use the cursor keys to select “Wireless(Wi-Fi)” and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.

The following connection methods are available.

• “Setting up a wireless connection using the WPS button” (p.175)

• “Setting up a wireless connection using an iOS device” (p.175)

• “Setting up a wireless connection by selecting from the list of available access

points” (p.

177

)

• “Setting up a wireless connection manually” (p.178)

• “Setting up a wireless connection by using the WPS PIN code” (p.180)

174

Setting up a wireless connection using the WPS

button

You can easily set up a wireless connection with one push of the WPS button.

Setup menu

“Network” > “Network Connection” > “Wireless(Wi-Fi)”

Use the cursor keys to select “WPS Button” and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys to select “NEXT” and press ENTER.

Read the on-screen description and push the WPS button on the

wireless router (access point).

Use the cursor keys to select “CONNECT” and press ENTER.

When the connection process finishes, “Completed” appears on the front

display.

If “Not connected” appears, repeat from step 1 or try another connection

method.

This completes the network settings.

NOTE

▪ The unit may not connect to the wireless router (access point) using WEP as the encryption method. In

this case, try another connection method.

▪ You can use INFO (WPS) on the front panel. Hold down INFO (WPS) for a few seconds to set up a

wireless connection and then “Press WPS button on Access Point

” appears on the front display, push the

WPS button.

About WPS

▪

WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) is a standard established by the Wi-Fi Alliance, which allows easy

establishment of a wireless home network.

Setting up a wireless connection using an iOS device

You can set up a wireless connection by applying the connection settings on iOS

devices (iPhone/iPad/iPod touch).

Before proceeding, confirm that your iOS device is connected to a wireless router.

NOTE

▪ This process will restore the default settings for the following.

– Network settings

– Bluetooth settings

– Bluetooth, USB, media server and network content registered as shortcuts

– Internet radio stations registered to “Favorites”

– Account information for the network services

▪ You need iOS device with iOS 7 or later. (The following procedure is a setup example for iOS 10.)

▪ This configuration does not work if the security method of your wireless router (access point) is WEP. In

this case, use other connection method.

Setup menu

“Network” > “Network Connection” > “Wireless(Wi-Fi)”

175

Use the cursor keys to select “Share Wi-Fi Settings (iOS)” and

press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys to select “NEXT” and press ENTER.

Read the on-screen description and select “NEXT” and then,

press ENTER.

NOTE

When you use wired network connection, a warning message is displayed on the screen.

Disconnect the network cable from the unit, and then press ENTER.

On the iOS device, select the unit as the AirPlay speaker in the Wi-

Fi screen.

iOS 10 (example of English version)

The name of the unit

Select the network (access point) of which you want to share the

settings with the unit.

The network currently selected

Tap here to start setup

When the sharing process finishes, the unit is automatically connected to

the selected network (access point) and “Completed” appears on the

front display.

If “Not shared” or “Not connected” appears, press ENTER to repeat from

step 1 or try another connection method.

Press SETUP.

This completes the network settings.

176

Setting up a wireless connection by selecting from

the list of available access points

You can set up a wireless connection by selecting an access point from the list of

wireless LAN routers (access points) found by the unit. You need to manually enter the

security key.

Setup menu

“Network” > “Network Connection” > “Wireless(Wi-Fi)”

Use the cursor keys to select “Access Point Scan” and press

ENTER.

Use the cursor keys to select “NEXT” and press ENTER.

After searching for access points, the list of available access points

appears on the TV.

Use the cursor keys to select the desired access point and press

ENTER.

A check mark is put on the desired access point.

Use the cursor keys to select “NEXT” and press ENTER.

The edit screen appears.

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the security key.

177

When finished entering the key, use the cursor keys to select

“NEXT” and press ENTER.

The wireless connection setting screen appears on the TV.

Access Point X

Use the cursor keys to select “CONNECT” and press ENTER to

start the connection process.

When the connection process finishes, “Completed” appears on the TV

screen.

If “Not connected” appears, repeat from step 1 or try another connection

method.

Press SETUP.

This completes the network settings.

Setting up a wireless connection manually

You can set up a wireless connection by entering the required information manually.

You need to set up the SSID (network name), encryption method and security key for

your network.

Setup menu

“Network” > “Network Connection” > “Wireless(Wi-Fi)”

Use the cursor keys to select “Manual Setting” and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys to select “NEXT” and press ENTER.

The edit screen appears.

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the SSID of the access

point.

178

When finished entering the key, use the cursor keys to select

“NEXT” and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys to select the encryption method.

Choices

None, WEP, WPA-PSK(AES), Mixed Mode

NOTE

If you select “None”, the connection may be insecure since the communication is not encrypted.

Use the cursor keys to select “NEXT” and press ENTER.

The edit screen appears.

NOTE

If you select “None” in step 5, this item is not available.

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the security key.

When finished entering the key, use the cursor keys to select

“NEXT” and press ENTER.

The manual setting screen appears on the TV.

Use the cursor keys to select “CONNECT” and press ENTER to

start the connection process.

When the connection process finishes, “Completed” appears on the TV

screen.

If “Not connected” appears, check that all the information is entered

correctly, and repeat from step 1.

Press SETUP.

This completes the network settings.

179

Setting up a wireless connection by using the WPS

PIN code

You can set up a wireless connection by entering the unit’s PIN code into the wireless

router (access point). The method is available if the wireless router (access point)

supports the WPS PIN code method.

Setup menu

“Network” > “Network Connection” > “Wireless(Wi-Fi)”

Use the cursor keys to select “PIN Code” and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys to select “NEXT” and press ENTER.

The list of available access points appears on the TV.

Use the cursor keys to select the desired access point and press

ENTER.

Use the cursor keys to select “NEXT” and press ENTER.

The PIN code of the unit appears on the TV screen.

Enter the unit’s PIN code into the wireless router (access point).

For details on settings, refer to the instruction manual of the wireless

router (access point).

Use the cursor keys to select “CONNECT” and press ENTER to

start the connection process.

When the connection process finishes, “Completed” appears on the TV

screen.

If “Not connected” appears, repeat from step 1 or try another connection

method.

Press SETUP.

This completes the network settings.

180

Input/output jacks and cables

Video/audio jacks

HDMI jacks

Transmit digital video and digital sound through a single jack. Use an HDMI cable.

(

5 STB

)

(

1 MOVIE

)

HDMI cable

NOTE

▪ Use a 19-pin HDMI cable with the HDMI logo. We recommend using a cable as short as possible to

prevent signal quality degradation.

▪ The unit’s HDMI jacks support the HDMI Control, Audio Return Channel (ARC), and 3D and 4K Ultra HD

video transmission (through output) features.

▪ Use a Premium High Speed HDMI Cable or Premium High Speed Cable with Ethernet to enjoy 3D or 4K

Ultra HD videos.

Video jacks

COMPONENT VIDEO jacks

Transmit video signals separated into three components: luminance (Y), chrominance

blue (Pb), and chrominance red (Pr). Use a component video cable with three plugs.

Component video cable

VIDEO jacks

Transmit analog video signals. Use a video pin cable.

AV 2

Video pin cable

181

Audio jacks

OPTICAL jack

Transmit digital audio signals. Use a digital optical cable. If there is a protective cap

on the tip of the cable, remove it before using the cable.

UDIO 1

(

7 TV

)

OPTICAL

Digital optical cable

COAXIAL jacks

Transmit digital audio signals. Use a digital coaxial cable.

COAXIAL

UDIO 3

Digital coaxial cable

AUDIO jacks

Transmit analog stereo audio signals.

(Stereo L/R jacks)

Use a stereo pin cable (RCA cable).

AUDIO

Stereo pin cable

(Stereo mini jack)

Use a stereo mini-plug cable.

AUDIO

Stereo mini-plug cable

182

Using presence speakers

Presence speaker layout

The following three layout patterns are available for the presence speakers. Choose a

layout pattern that suits your listening environment.

• Front Height

• Overhead

• Dolby Enabled SP

NOTE

▪ You can enjoy Dolby Atmos, DTS:X or Cinema DSP 3D with any layout pattern.

▪ When using presence speakers, configure the “Layout” setting in the “Setup” menu before automatically

optimizing the speaker settings (YPAO). For details, see the following:

– “Setting the layout of the presence speakers” (p.113)

Installing the presence speakers in Front Height

position

Install the presence speakers on the front wall (Front Height).

It delivers a natural sound field with excellent linkage of left, right, top and bottom

sound spaces, and sound extensity effectively.

Installing the presence speakers in Overhead

position

Install the presence speakers to the ceiling above the listening position (Overhead).

It delivers realistic overhead sound effects and sound field with excellent linkage of

front and rear sound spaces effectively.

CAUTION

▪ Be sure to use speakers that are made for ceiling use and take anti-drop measures. Ask a qualified

contractor or dealer personnel for installation works.

NOTE

When installing presence speakers to a ceiling, install them just above the listening position, or the ceiling

between the extensions of the front speakers and listening position.

183

Using Dolby Enabled speakers as the presence

speakers

Use Dolby Enabled speakers as the presence speakers.

This utilizes sound reflected from ceiling and lets you enjoy overhead sound only from

speakers that are placed at the same level as traditional speakers.

NOTE

▪ Place the Dolby Enabled speakers on top of or near the traditional front speakers.

▪ A Dolby Enabled speaker unit may be integrated into a traditional speaker. For details, refer to the

instruction manual of the Dolby Enabled speakers.

184

Glossary

Glossary of audio information

Glossary of audio decoding format

This is a glossary of the technical terms related to audio decoding format used in this

manual.

Dolby Atmos

Introduced first in the cinema, Dolby Atmos brings a revolutionary sense of dimension and

immersion to the Home Theater experience. Dolby Atmos is an adaptable and scalable object

based format that reproduces audio as independent sounds (or objects) that can be accurately

positioned and move dynamically throughout the 3 dimensional listening space during playback.

A key ingredient of Dolby Atmos is the introduction of a height plane of sound above the listener.

Dolby Atmos Stream

Dolby Atmos content will be delivered to your Dolby Atmos enabled AV receiver via Dolby Digital

Plus or Dolby TrueHD on Blu-ray Disc, downloadable files and streaming media. A Dolby Atmos

stream contains special metadata that describes the positioning of sounds within the room. This

object audio data is decoded by a Dolby Atmos AV receiver and scaled for optimum playback

through Home Theater speaker systems of every size and configuration.

Dolby Digital

Dolby Digital is a compressed digital audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. that

supports 5.1-channel audio. This technology is used for audio on most DVD disc.

Dolby Digital Plus

Dolby Digital Plus is a compressed digital audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. that

supports 7.1-channel audio. Dolby Digital Plus remains fully compatible with the existing

multichannel audio systems that support Dolby Digital. This technology is used for audio

streaming services on the Internet and audio on BD (Blu-ray Disc).

Dolby Enabled Speaker

A convenient alternative to speakers built into the ceiling, products utilizing Dolby speaker

technology employ the ceiling above you as a reflective surface for reproducing audio in the

height plane above the listener. Dolby enabled speakers feature a unique upward firing driver and

special signal processing that can be built into a conventional speaker, or a standalone speaker

module, minimally impacting the overall speaker system footprint while providing an immersive

listening experience during Dolby Atmos and Dolby surround playback.

Dolby Surround

Dolby surround is a next generation surround technology that intelligently up mixes stereo; 5.1

and 7.1 content for playback through your surround speaker system. Dolby surround is

compatible with traditional speaker layouts, as well as Dolby Atmos enabled playback systems

that employ in-ceiling speakers or products with Dolby speaker technology.

Dolby TrueHD

Dolby TrueHD is an advanced lossless audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. to

offer a high-definition home theater experience with the quality of the studio master. Dolby TrueHD

can carry up to eight channels of 96 kHz/24-bit audio (up to six channels of 192 kHz/24-bit audio)

simultaneously. This technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray Disc).

DTS 96/24

DTS 96/24 is a compressed digital audio format that supports 5.1-channel and 96 kHz/24-bit

audio. This format remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that

support DTS Digital Surround. This technology is used for music DVDs, etc.

DTS Dialog Control

DTS Dialog Control allows you to boost the dialog. This can be useful in noisy environments to

help make the dialog more intelligible. People with impaired hearing may also benefit. Note that

the content creator may disable the use of this feature in the mix, so that DTS Dialog Control may

not always be available. Note that updates to your AVR may add more functionality to DTS Dialog

Control or increase the range of the feature.

DTS Digital Surround

DTS Digital Surround is a compressed digital audio format developed by DTS, Inc. that supports

5.1-channel audio. This technology is used for audio on most DVD discs.

DTS-ES

DTS-ES creates total 6.1-channel audio from 5.1-channel sources that are recorded with DTS-ES.

This decoder adds a surround back sound to the original 5.1-channel sound. In the DTS-ES Matrix

6.1 format, a surround back sound is recorded in the surround channels, and in the DTS-ES

Discrete 6.1 format, a discrete surround back channel is recorded.

DTS Express

DTS Express is a compressed digital audio format that supports 5.1-channel audio and allows a

higher compression rate than the DTS Digital Surround format developed by DTS, Inc. This

technology is developed for audio streaming services on the Internet and secondary audio on BD

(Blu-ray Disc).

DTS-HD High Resolution Audio

DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is a compressed digital audio format developed by DTS, Inc. that

supports 7.1-channel and 96 kHz/24-bit audio. DTS-HD High Resolution Audio remains fully

compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that support DTS Digital Surround. This

technology is used for audio on most BD (Blu-ray Disc).

DTS-HD Master Audio

DTS-HD Master Audio is an advanced lossless audio format developed to offer a high-definition

home theater experience with the quality of the studio master by DTS, Inc. DTS-HD Master Audio

can carry up to eight channels of 96 kHz/24-bit audio (up to six channels of 192 kHz/24-bit audio)

simultaneously. This technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray Disc).

DTS Neo: 6

DTS Neo: 6 enables 6-channel playback from 2-channel sources. There are two modes available:

“Music mode” for music sources and “Cinema mode” for movie sources. This technology provides

discrete full-bandwidth matrix channels of surround sound.

185

DTS:X

DTS:X is the next generation object-based, multi-dimensional audio technology from DTS.

Unbound from channels, DTS:X conveys the fluid movement of sound to create an incredibly rich,

realistic and immersive soundscape - in front of, behind, beside and above the audience - more

accurately than ever before. DTS:X offers the ability to automatically adapt the audio to the

speaker layout that best fits the space, from a television’s built-in speakers to a home surround

theater system to a dozen or more speakers in a commercial cinema. Immerse yourself at

www.dts.com/dtsx

DSD (Direct Stream Digital)

DSD (Direct Stream Digital) technology stores audio signals on digital storage media, such as

SACD (Super Audio CDs). The signals are stored at a high-frequency sampling rate (such as 11.2

MHz). The highest frequency response is equal to or higher than 100 kHz, with a dynamic range

of 120 dB. This technology offers better audio quality than that used for CDs.

FLAC

FLAC is a file format for lossless audio data compression. FLAC is inferior to lossy compressed

audio formats in compression rate but provides higher audio quality.

MP3

One of the compressed digital audio format used by MPEG. With psychoacoustic technologies,

this compression method achieves a high compression rate. Reportedly, it is capable of

compressing data quantity by about 1/10 maintaining a certain level of audio quality.

MPEG-4 AAC

An MPEG-4 audio standard. It is used for mobile telephones, portable audio players, and audio

streaming services on Internet because it allows a high compression rate of data while

maintaining better audio quality than MP3.

Neural:X

Neural:X is the latest downmixing/upmixing and spatial remapping technology from DTS. It is built

in to DTS:X to provide upmix of Neural:X-encoded and non-encoded (PCM) data. In DTS:X for

AVRs and Sound Bars, Neural:X can produce up to 11.x channels.

PCM (Pulse Code Modulation)

PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is digitized, recorded, and transmitted.

This technology is the basis of all other audio format. This technology is used as a lossless audio

format called Linear PCM for audio on a variety of media, including CDs.

Sampling frequency/Quantization bit

Sampling frequency and quantization bits indicate the quantity of information when an analog

audio signal is digitized. These values are noted as in the following example: “48 kHz/24-bit”.

• Sampling frequency

Sampling frequency (the number of times the signal is sampled per second) is called the

sampling rate. When the sampling frequency is higher, the range of frequencies that can be

played back are wider.

• Quantization bit

The number of quantization bits indicate the degree of accuracy when converting the sound

level into a numeric value. When the number of quantized bits is higher, the expression of the

sound level is more accurate.

WAV

Windows standard audio file format, which defines the method of recording the digital data

obtained by converting audio signals. By default, the PCM method (no compression) is used, but

you can also use other compression methods.

WMA (Windows Media Audio)

One of the compressed digital audio formats developed by Microsoft Corporation. With

psychoacoustic technologies, this compression method achieves a high compression rate.

Reportedly, it is capable of compressing data quantity by about 1/20 maintaining a certain level of

audio quality.

Glossary of audio information other than audio

decoding format

This is a glossary of the technical terms related to audio information used in this

manual.

Bi-amplification connection (Bi-amp)

A bi-amplification connection uses two amplifiers for a speaker. When you use the bi-amplification

connection, the unit drives the tweeter and woofer in a speaker with the discrete amplifiers. As a

consequence, the tweeter and woofer provide clear audio signal without the interference.

LFE (Low Frequency Effects) 0.1 channel

This channel reproduces low-frequency bass signals and has a frequency range from 20 Hz to

120 Hz. This channel is added to the channels for all bands with Dolby Digital or DTS to enhance

low frequency audio effects. This channel is labeled 0.1 because it is limited to only low frequency

audio.

Lip sync

Video output sometimes lags behind audio output due to the complexity of signal processing

caused by an increase in video signal capacity. Lip sync is a technique for automatically

correcting the timing lag between audio and video output.

Glossary of HDMI and video information

This is a glossary of the technical terms related to HDMI and video information used in

this manual.

Component video signal

With the component video signal system, the video signal is separated into the Y signal for

luminance and the Pb and Pr signals for chrominance. Color can be reproduced more faithfully

with this system because each of these signals is independent.

Composite video signal

With the composite video signal system, color, brightness, and synchronization data signals are

combined and transmitted with a single cable.

186

Deep Color

Deep Color is a technology that HDMI specification supports. Deep Color increases the number of

available colors within the boundaries defined by the RGB or YCbCr color space. Conventional

color systems process the color using 8 bits. Deep Color processes the color with 10, 12, or 16

bits. This technology allows HDTVs and other displays to increase from millions of colors to

billions of colors and eliminate on-screen color banding for smooth tonal transitions and subtle

gradations between colors.

HDCP

HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection) is a digital copy protection form that prevents

copying of digital contents as it travels across connections (such as HDMI).

HDMI

HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the world-wide standard interface for digital audio/

video signal transmission. This interface transmits both digital audio and digital video signals

using a single cable without any loss. HDMI complies with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content

Protection) and provides a secure audio/video interface. For further information on HDMI, visit the

HDMI website at “http://www.hdmi.org/”.

x.v.Color

“x.v.Color” is a technology that the HDMI specification supports. It is a more extensive color

space than sRGB and allows the expression of colors that were not hitherto possible. While

remaining compatible with the color gamut of sRGB standards, “x.v.Color” expands the color

space, and thus can produce more vivid, natural images.

Glossary of network information

This is a glossary of the technical terms related to network information used in this

manual.

SSID

SSID (Service Set Identifier) is a name that identifies a particular wireless LAN access point.

Wi-Fi

Wi-Fi (Wireless Fidelity) is a technology that allows an electronic device to exchange data or

connect to the Internet wirelessly using radio waves. Wi-Fi offers the advantage of eliminating the

complexity of making connections with LAN cables by using wireless connection. Only products

that complete Wi-Fi Alliance interoperability tests can carry the “Wi-Fi Certified” trademark.

WPS

WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) is a standard established by the Wi-Fi Alliance, which allows easy

establishment of a wireless home network.

Glossary of Yamaha technologies

This is a glossary of the technical terms related to Yamaha technologies used in this

manual.

CINEMA DSP (Digital Sound Field Processor)

Since the surround sound systems were originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect

is best experienced in a theater that has many speakers designed for acoustic effects. Since

home conditions (such as room size, wall material, and number of speakers) can differ so widely,

it is inevitable that there are differences in the sound that you hear. Based on a wealth of actually

measured data, CINEMA DSP, Yamaha’s original DSP technology provides the audiovisual

experience of a movie theater in your own home.

CINEMA DSP 3D

The actually measured sound field data contain the information of the height of the sound images.

CINEMA DSP 3D mode achieves the reproduction of the accurate height of the sound images so

that it creates the accurate and intensive 3D sound fields in a listening room.

Compressed Music Enhancer

The Compressed Music Enhancer feature compensates for missing harmonics in compression

music formats (such as MP3). As a result, this technology provides improved performance for the

overall sound system.

SILENT CINEMA

Yamaha has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm for headphones.

Parameters for headphones have been set for each sound program, so that accurate

representations of all the sound programs can be enjoyed on headphones.

Virtual CINEMA DSP

Virtual CINEMA DSP allows the system to virtually reproduce the sound field of the surround

speakers with front left and right speakers. Even if the surround speakers are not connected, the

unit creates the realistic sound field in a listening room.

187

Virtual CINEMA FRONT

Virtual CINEMA FRONT allows the system to virtually reproduce the sound field of the surround

speakers with front surround speakers. Even if the surround speakers placed in the front, the unit

creates the realistic sound field in a listening room.

Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS)

Virtual Presence Speaker allows the system to virtually reproduce the height of the 3D sound field

without presence speakers. Even if the presence speakers are not connected, the unit creates the

3D sound field in your room.

Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS)

Virtual Surround Back Speaker allows the system to virtually reproduce the sound field of the

surround back speakers with surround speaker. Even if the surround back speakers are not

connected, the unit adds a sense of depth to the rear sound filed of CINEMA DSP.

YPAO (Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer)

The Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) function detects speaker connections,

measures the distances from them to your listening position(s), and then automatically optimizes

the speaker settings, such as volume balance and acoustic parameters, to suit your room.

Supported devices and file formats

Supported Bluetooth® devices

The following Bluetooth devices can be used by the unit.

• Bluetooth devices that support A2DP can be used.

• Operation of all Bluetooth devices cannot be guaranteed.

Supported USB devices

The following USB devices can be used by the unit.

• This unit is compatible with USB memory devices that are in FAT16 or FAT32 format.

Do not connect any other type of USB devices.

• USB devices with encryption cannot be used.

• Operation of all USB devices cannot be guaranteed.

Supported AirPlay devices

This AV Receiver is compatible with AirPlay 2. iOS 11.4 or later is required.

188

Supported file formats

The following file formats can be used by the unit.

File

Sampling

frequency

(kHz)

Quantization

bit (bit)

Bitrate (kbps)

Number of

channels

Support for

gapless

playback

WAV *

32/44.1/48/

88.2/96/

176.4/192

16/24/32 - 2

MP3

32/44.1/48 - 8 to 320 2 -

WMA

32/44.1/48 - 8 to 320 2 -

MPEG-4 AAC

32/44.1/48 - 8 to 320 2 -

FLAC

32/44.1/48/

88.2/96/

176.4/192

16/24 - 2

ALAC

32/44.1/48/

88.2/96

16/24 - 2

AIFF

32/44.1/48/

88.2/96/

176.4/192

16/24/32 - 2

DSD

2.8 MHz/

5.6 MHz/

11.2 MHz

1 - 2 -

* Linear PCM format only. 32 bit-float files cannot be played back.

• The playable file formats differ depending on the software installed on media

servers (PCs/NAS). Refer to the instruction manual of the server software for details.

• Digital Rights Management (DRM) contents cannot be played back.

Video signal flow

Video signals input from a video device to the unit are output to a TV as follows.

HDMIHDMI HDMI HDMI

VIDEOVIDEO

Y PB PR

COMPONENT VIDEO

AV 1

Y PB PR

COMPONENT VIDEO

AV 1

Video device The unit TV

COMPONENT

VIDEO in

HDMI in

HDMI out

VIDEO in

189

Video conversion table

Video conversion table is shown as follows.

NOTE

▪ You can select the resolution and the aspect ratio applied to HDMI-output video processing in “Video

Mode” in the “

Setup” menu. For details, see the following:

–

“Setting the use of the video signal processing” (p.129)

▪ The unit does not convert 480-line and 576-line video signals interchangeably.

Resolution

HDMI out

480i/

576i

480p/

576p

720p 1080i 1080p 4K

HDMI in

480i/576i

m m m m m m

480p/576p

m m m m m

720p

m m m m

1080i

m m m m

1080p/50, 60 Hz

m m m m

1080p/24 Hz

m m

COMPONENT

VIDEO in

480i/576i

m m m m m m

VIDEO in 480i/576i

m m m m m m

m: Available

190

Additional information on HDMI

HDMI Control and synchronized operations

HDMI Control allows you to operate external devices via HDMI. If you connect a TV

that supports HDMI Control to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can control the unit

(such as power and volume) with TV remote control operations. You can also control

external devices (such as HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD players) connected to

the unit with an HDMI cable.

Operations available from the TV’s remote control

• Standby

• Volume control including mute

• Switching to input audio from the TV when the TV input is switched to its built-in

tuner

• Switching to input video/audio from the selected playback device

• Switching between audio output devices (the unit or TV speaker)

(Example)

HDMI Control HDMI Control

The unit turns off (standby)

Playback device also

turns off

Turn off the TV

Operations available from the unit’s remote control

• Starting playback on the playback device and turning on the TV with a scene

selection

• Switching the TV input to display the “Setup” menu (when SETUP is pressed)

• Controlling the external device from which video is displayed on the TV (playback

and menu operations)

• Controlling the TV when you select TV audio input that is set in “TV Audio Input” in

the “Setup” menu

• Controlling the TV with the color (RED/GREEN/YELLOW/BLUE) keys of the remote

control when “

TV Control” is set for the color keys

(Example)

HDMI Control HDMI Control

Press SCENE1

Playback starts

Turns on and displays video

from the playback device

NOTE

▪ HDMI Control might not work properly.

▪ For details on the scene selection, see the following:

– “Selecting a registered scene” (p.89)

▪ For details on TV audio input, see the following:

– “Setting the audio jack used for TV audio input” (p.130)

▪ For details on the functions for the RED/GREEN/YELLOW/BLUE keys, see the following:

– “Setting the unit's functions for the RED/GREEN/YELLOW/BLUE keys of the remote control” (p.147)

To use HDMI Control, you need to perform the following HDMI Control link setup after

connecting the TV and playback devices.

For details on settings and operating your TV, refer to the instruction manual for the TV.

NOTE

This setup is required every time you add a new HDMI Control-compatible device to your system.

Turn on the unit, TV, and playback devices.

Enable the HDMI Control function on the unit, TV and HDMI

Control-compatible playback devices (such as BD/DVD players).

In order to enable the HDMI Control function on the unit, set “HDMI

Control

” in the “Setup” menu to “On”, and then configure the settings in

Yamaha RX-A880 de handleiding

Merk: Yamaha

Model: RX-A880

Categorie: Auto media-ontvangers

Type: de handleiding

Download PDF

rapport

in andere talen

English: Yamaha RX-A880 Owner's manual
italiano: Yamaha RX-A880 Manuale del proprietario
русский: Yamaha RX-A880 Инструкция по применению
français: Yamaha RX-A880 Le manuel du propriétaire
español: Yamaha RX-A880 El manual del propietario
Deutsch: Yamaha RX-A880 Bedienungsanleitung
português: Yamaha RX-A880 Manual do proprietário
dansk: Yamaha RX-A880 Brugervejledning
suomi: Yamaha RX-A880 Omistajan opas
svenska: Yamaha RX-A880 Bruksanvisning
Türkçe: Yamaha RX-A880 El kitabı

Yamaha RX-A880 de handleiding

Yamaha RX-A880 de handleiding

in andere talen

Gerelateerde artikelen

Andere documenten